Keysight x-series User Reference Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Keysight Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. x-series
  6. User reference manual

Keysight x-series User Reference Manual

Signal analyzer
Hide thumbs Also See for x-series:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Manual
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
This manual provides documentation for the following
X-Series Analyzers:
PXA Signal Analyzer N9030A
MXA Signal Analyzer N9020A
EXA Signal Analyzer N9010A
CXA Signal Analyzer N9000A
EMI Receiver N9038A
EMI Receiver Mode
User's &
Programmer's
Reference

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Keysight x-series

Summary of Contents for Keysight x-series

  • Page 1 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer This manual provides documentation for the following X-Series Analyzers: PXA Signal Analyzer N9030A MXA Signal Analyzer N9020A EXA Signal Analyzer N9010A CXA Signal Analyzer N9000A EMI Receiver N9038A EMI Receiver Mode User’s & Programmer’s Reference...

  • Page 2: Safety Notices

    2010-2014 information contained herein. 7015 (b)(2) (November 1995), as No part of this manual may be Should Keysight and the user applicable in any technical data. have a separate written reproduced in any form or by any agreement with warranty terms...

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    EMI Receiver Mode User’s & Programmer’s Reference Table of Contents 1 About the Analyzer Installing Application Software Viewing a License Key Obtaining and Installing a License Key Updating Measurement Application Software X-Series Options and Accessories Front-Panel Features Display Annotations Rear-Panel Features Window Control Keys Multi-Window Zoom...
  • Page 4 Table of Contents Operation Register Operation Condition Query Operation Enable Operation Event Query Operation Negative Transition Operation Positive Transition Preset the Status Byte Questionable Register Questionable Condition Questionable Enable Questionable Event Query Questionable Negative Transition Questionable Positive Transition Questionable Calibration Register Questionable Calibration Condition Questionable Calibration Enable Questionable Calibration Event Query...
  • Page 5 Table of Contents Questionable Integrity Register Questionable Integrity Condition Questionable Integrity Enable Questionable Integrity Event Query Questionable Integrity Negative Transition Questionable Integrity Positive Transition Questionable Integrity Signal Register Questionable Integrity Signal Condition Questionable Integrity Signal Enable Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Register...
  • Page 6 Table of Contents Trigger Self Test Query Wait-to-Continue 4 Input/Output Functions Input/Output Input/Output variables - Preset behavior RF Input Input Z Correction RF Coupling RF Input Port RF Input RF Input 2 RF Preselector Baseband I/Q (Option BBA) Baseband I/Q Remote Language Compatibility I/Q Path I+jQ I Only...
  • Page 7 Table of Contents External Gain Ext Preamp More Information I Ext Gain Q Ext Gain Restore Input/Output Defaults Corrections Select Correction Correction On/Off Properties Select Correction Antenna Unit Frequency Interpolation Description Comment Edit Navigate Frequency Amplitude Insert Point Below Delete Point Delete Correction Apply Corrections Delete All Corrections...
  • Page 8 Table of Contents Gate Source Point Trigger Odd/Even Trace Point Analog Out More Information Auto Screen Video Demod Audio Digital Bus Bus Out On/Off I/Q Cal Out Aux IF Out Second IF I/Q Guided Calibration I/Q Isolation Calibration Next Exit I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Command Only) I/Q Cable Calibrate…...
  • Page 9 Table of Contents SCPI Language Compatibility 89601 VSA Application Mode Number Selection (Remote Command Only) Application Mode Catalog Query (Remote Command Only) Application Identification (Remote Commands Only) Current Application Model Current Application Revision Current Application Options Application Identification Catalog (Remote Commands Only) Application Catalog Number of Entries Application Catalog Model Numbers Application Catalog Revision...
  • Page 10 Table of Contents TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK Vector Signal Analyzer (VXA) W-CDMA with HSPA+ WLAN Global Settings Global Center Freq Restore Defaults Mode Setup EMC Standard Preset To Mode IDN Response Meters Control Meters Select Meters Meter Detector (Meter) Limit Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only) All Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only) Current Power (Remote Query Only) Peak Power (Remote Query Only)
  • Page 11 Table of Contents V-network Phase 150 kHz Highpass V-network Restore Mode Defaults 6 System Functions File File Explorer Print Maximize/Restore Down Maximize Restore Down Page Setup Print Restore Down Minimize Exit Print System Show Errors Previous Page Next Page History Verbose SCPI On/Off Refresh Clear Error Queue...
  • Page 12 Table of Contents Mode and Input/Output Defaults User Preset Last State Power On Application Configure Applications Preloading Applications Access to Configure Applications utility Virtual memory usage Select All Deselect All Move Up Move Down Select/Deselect Save Changes and Exit Exit Without Saving Restore Power On Defaults Configure Applications - Instrument boot-up Configure Applications - Windows desktop...
  • Page 13 Table of Contents Perform Restore (Remote Command Only) Advanced Characterize Preselector Characterize Reference Clock Characterize Noise Floor TDS Alignment Timebase DAC Calibrated User RF Preselector Align Now Alert Schedule Setup Scheduler I/O Config GPIB GPIB Address GPIB Controller SCPI LAN SCPI Telnet SCPI Socket SICL Server...
  • Page 14 Table of Contents Security Read-Write Read only Diagnostics Show Hardware Statistics SCPI for Show Hardware Statistics ( Remote Commands Only) Query the Mechanical Relay Cycle Count Query the Operating Temperature Extremes Query the Elapsed Time since 1st power on Advanced Internet Explorer…...
  • Page 15 Table of Contents Trig Holdoff 8 Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Ref Level Attenuation Scale/ Div Presel Center Proper Preselector Operation Preselector Adjust Y Axis Unit dBmV dBmA dBµV dBµA dBpW Antenna Unit dBµV/m dBµA/m dBµA dBpT None Ref Level Offset Internal Preamp Low Band Full Range...
  • Page 16 Table of Contents File FREQ Channel Frequency Midspan Frequency Start Frequency Stop Frequency Freq/ Step Scale Type Input/Output Marker Select Marker Normal Delta Properties Select Marker Relative To Marker Trace Couple Markers All Markers Off Marker X Axis Value (Remote Command Only) Marker Y Axis Value (Remote Command Only) Backwards Compatibility SCPI Commands Normal Marker State (Remote Command Only)
  • Page 17 Table of Contents Marker To Marker à List Meas at Mkr Result à List Mkr à Meters (Move Meters to Marker Freq) Metersà Mkr (Move Marker to Meters Freq) Meters à Signal (Replace) Meters à List (Append) Snap to Meters (Select Closest Signal) Meas Remote Measurement Functions Measurement Group of Commands...
  • Page 18 Table of Contents Sort Signals By Freq By Det Amptd Type By Δ Detector Type By Time Sort Order Auto Sort Comment Step Control Scan Table Select Range Range State Start Freq Stop Freq Res BW Display Scan Table Dwell Time Step Size Scan Time Scan Points...
  • Page 19 Table of Contents Autorange Auto Preamp # of Scans (Avg Number) Scan Type Time Domain Setup Limits Select Limit Limit On/Off Properties Select Limit Test Trace Interpolation Fixed/ Relative Description Comment Margin Edit Limit Navigate Frequency Amplitude Insert Point Below Delete Point Copy from Limit Build From Trace...
  • Page 20 Table of Contents De-emphasis (FM Demod Only) ΦM LISN Control (Measure) V-network Settings Phase 150 kHz Highpass Protective Earth Meas Preset Mark Signal (Remote Command Only) Clear Mark (Remote Command Only) Delete Signal (Remote Command Only) Range Count (Remote Command Only) Final Measurement (Remote Command Only) Search Method (Remote Command Only) No of Peaks (Remote Command Only)
  • Page 21 Table of Contents Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Data (Import) Amplitude Correction Default Directory Trace Limit Default Directory Signal List Scan Table Open… State Data (Import) Amplitude Correction Trace Limit Open Restart More Information Save State To File .
  • Page 22 Table of Contents Trace Amplitude Correction Display Limits Display State Screen State Scan Table On/Off Signal List On/Off Output Format Save As . . . Screen Image Themes 3D Color 3D Monochrome Flat Color Flat Monochrome Save As… Mass Storage Catalog  (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Device Copy (Remote Command Only)
  • Page 23 Table of Contents View/Blank Trace Update State (Remote Command Only) Trace Display State (Remote Command Only) Detector (Trace) Peak Quasi Peak EMI Average RMS Average Average Negative Peak Copy/Exchange From Trace To Trace Copy Now Exchange Now Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Query Trace Data Backwards Compatibility SCPI commands Trace Display (Remote Command Only)
  • Page 24 Table of Contents View/ Display Display Annotation Meas Bar On/Off Screen Trace Active Function Values On/Off Title Change Title Clear Title Graticule Display Line System Display Settings Annotation Local Settings Themes Backlight Backlight Intensity Meters Display Meters Freq Line Next Range 9 Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD ...
  • Page 25 Table of Contents Antenna Unit dBµV/m dBµA/m dBµA dBpT None Reference Level Offset Internal Preamp Low Band Full Range Auto Couple More Information Auto/Man Active Function keys Auto/Man 1-of-N keys Res BW Filter BW Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep) File FREQ Channel Frequency Freq/ Step Input/Output...
  • Page 26 Table of Contents Marker Zoom Out Full Marker To MkrΔ->Span Meas Remote Measurement Functions Measurement Group of Commands Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only) Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only) Data Query (Remote Command Only) Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only) Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only) Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)
  • Page 27 Table of Contents State Data (Import) Amplitude Correction Trace Limit Open Restart More Information Save State To File . . . Edit Register Names More Information Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Save As . . . Data (Export) Amplitude Correction Correction Data File...
  • Page 28 Table of Contents SPAN X Scale Ref Value Scale/Div Strip Chart Max Duration Full Scale Sweep/Control Stop / Start System Trace/Detector Select Trace Clear Trace Clear All Traces Trigger Free Run Video Trigger Level Trig Slope Trig Delay External 1 Trigger Level Trig Slope Trig Delay...
  • Page 29 Table of Contents Change Title Clear Title Graticule System Display Settings Annotation Local Settings Themes Backlight Backlight Intensity Expand Meters Strip Chart  View 10 Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Reference Level Attenuation Scale/ Div Presel Center Proper Preselector Operation Preselector Adjust Y Axis Unit dBmV...
  • Page 30 Table of Contents Grid Bottom Level (Remote Command Only) Grid Top Level (Remote Command Only) Auto Couple More Information Auto/Man Active Function keys Auto/Man 1-of-N keys RBW (Meters) RBW (Spectrum) Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep) File FREQ Channel Frequency Freq/ Step CF à Signal (Replace) CF à...
  • Page 31 Table of Contents Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only) Data Query (Remote Command Only) Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only) Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only) Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only) Meas Setup Select Signal Signal List...
  • Page 32 Table of Contents Interpolation Fixed/ Relative Description Comment Margin Edit Limit Navigate Frequency Amplitude Insert Point Below Delete Point Copy from Limit Build From Trace Offset Scale X Axis Test Limits (All Limits) Delete Limit Delete All Limits Limit Line Fail? (Remote Command Only) Trace Fail? (Remote Command Only) Limit Line Control (Remote Command Only) Limit Line Upper (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard compatibility)
  • Page 33 Table of Contents Pk Threshold On/Off Pk Threshold Line On/Off Mkr->CF Marker Delta Peak Search (Remote Command Only) Next Peak (Remote Command Only) Next Peak Right (Remote Command Only) Next Peak Left (Remote Command Only) Delta Peak Search (Remote Command Only) Delta Next Peak ...
  • Page 34 Table of Contents Amplitude Correction Trace Frequency Scan Trace File Content Strip Chart Trace File Content Monitor Spectrum Trace File Content Limit Limits File Contents .csv file format .lim file format Save As . . . Screen Image Themes 3D Color 3D Monochrome Flat Color Flat Monochrome...
  • Page 35 Table of Contents Trace Update State On/Off Trace Display State On/Off More Information Copy Trace 1 To Trace 2 Copy Trace 1 To Trace 3 Copy Trace (Remote Command Only) Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Trace Display (Remote Command Only) Trigger Free Run Video...
  • Page 36 Table of Contents Annotation Local Settings Themes Backlight Backlight Intensity Expand Meters Freq Scan Graph Meters RBW Lines Example Views 11 APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Attenuation Autorange Autorange Auto Preamp Presel Center Proper Preselector Operation Preselector Adjust Amplitude Unit dBmV dBmA dBµV...
  • Page 37 Table of Contents Auto/Man 1-of-N keys Res BW Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep) File FREQ Channel Frequency Freq/ Step Freq à Signal (Replace) Freq à List (Append) Input/Output Marker Select Marker Normal Delta Properties Select Marker Relative To Marker Trace Couple Markers All Markers Off Backwards Compatibility SCPI Commands Normal Marker State...
  • Page 38 Table of Contents Select Signal Meas Time Measure Limits Select Limit Limit On/Off Properties Select Limit Test Trace Description Comment Edit Limit Navigate Frequency Disturbance Level (E limit)/ Probability of Time (r limit) APD Method Insert Point Below Delete Point Test Limits (All Limits) Delete Limit Delete All Limits...
  • Page 39 Table of Contents Recall State More Information From File… Edit Register Names Register 1 thru Register 16 Register 1 thru Register 16 Data (Import) Amplitude Correction Default Directory Trace Limit Default Directory Signal List Open… State Data (Import) Amplitude Correction Trace Limit Open...
  • Page 40 Table of Contents 3D Monochrome Flat Color Flat Monochrome Save As… Mass Storage Catalog  (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Device Copy (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Delete   (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Data (Remote Command Only) Mass Storage Make Directory ...
  • Page 41 Table of Contents Trig Slope 1012 Trig Delay 1013 Zero Span Delay Comp 1013 Auto/Holdoff 1013 Auto Trig 1013 Trig Holdoff 1013 User Preset 1014 User Preset 1014 User Preset All Modes 1015 Save User Preset 1016 View/Display 1017 Display 1017 Annotation 1017...
  • Page 42 Table of Contents Relative To 1041 Marker Trace 1041 Couple Marker 1042 All Marker Off 1042 Marker X Axis Value (Remote Command Only) 1043 Marker Y Axis Value ( Remote Command Only ) 1043 Marker Function 1044 Marker Zoom 1044 Marker Zoom Out 1044 Marker Zoom Out Full...
  • Page 43 Table of Contents Frequency 1064 150 kHZ 1065 500 kHZ 1065 1400 kHZ 1065 30 MHZ 1066 Manual 1066 Terminal 1066 Limit 1067 Attenuation 1067 Click Rate 1068 Display Setup Table 1069 Duration 1069 Click Correction 1069 Click Count 1070 By Δ...
  • Page 44 Table of Contents Restart 1093 More Information 1093 Save 1095 State 1095 To File . . . 1096 Edit Register Names 1098 More Information 1098 Register 1 thru Register 16 1099 Register 1 thru Register 16 1099 Data (Export) 1100 Amplitude Correction 1101 Correction Data File...
  • Page 45 Table of Contents Pause / Resume 1121 Stop / Start 1121 Start Analysis 1122 System 1123 Trace/Detector 1124 Trigger 1125 User Preset 1126 User Preset 1126 User Preset All Modes 1127 Save User Preset 1128 View/Display 1129 Display 1129 Annotation 1129 Meas Bar On/Off 1130...
  • Page 46 Table of Contents xlvi EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 47: About The Analyzer

    Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer EMI Receiver Mode Reference 1 About the Analyzer The X-Series signal analyzer measures and monitors complex RF and microwave signals. Analog baseband analysis is available on MXA. The analyzer integrates traditional spectrum measurements with advanced vector signal analysis to optimize speed, accuracy, ®...

  • Page 48: Installing Application Software

    You may want to keep a copy of your license key in a secure location. To do this, you can print out a copy of the display showing the license numbers. If you should lose your license key, call your nearest Keysight Technologies service or sales office for assistance.
  • Page 49 If the application you are interested in licensing is not available, you will need to do a software update. (To display a list of installed applications, press System, Show, System.) Check the appropriate page of the Keysight web site for the latest available software versions, according to the name of your instrument, as follows: http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa_software...

  • Page 50: X-Series Options And Accessories

    1  About the Analyzer X-Series Options and Accessories X-Series Options and Accessories You can view an online list of available Options and Accessories for your instrument as follows: 1. Browse to one of the following URLs, according to the product name of your analyzer: www.agilent.com/find/cxa...

  • Page 51: Front-Panel Features

    1  About the Analyzer Front-Panel Features Front-Panel Features The instrument's Front-panel features are fully detailed in the section "Front-Panel Features" (under the chapter "Front and Rear Panel Features") of the document: Getting Started Guide If you are viewing this information as a Help file in the instrument, then you can click on the link above to open the PDF document.

  • Page 52: Display Annotations

    1  About the Analyzer Display Annotations Display Annotations Display Annotations are fully detailed under the chapter "Front and Rear Panel Features" of the document: Getting Started Guide If you are viewing this information as a Help file in the instrument, then you can click on the link above to open the PDF document.

  • Page 53: Rear-Panel Features

    1  About the Analyzer Rear-Panel Features Rear-Panel Features The instrument's Rear-panel features are fully detailed in the section "Rear-Panel Features" (under the chapter "Front and Rear Panel Features") of the document: Getting Started Guide If you are viewing this information as a Help file in the instrument, then you can click on the link above to open the PDF document.

  • Page 54: Window Control Keys

    1  About the Analyzer Window Control Keys Window Control Keys The instrument provides three front-panel keys for controlling windows. They are Multi Window, Zoom, and Next Window. These are all “immediate action” keys. Multi-Window The Multi Window front-panel key will toggle you back and forth between the Normal View and the last Multi Window View (Zone Span, Trace Zoom or Spectrogram) that you were in, when using the Swept SA measurement of the Spectrum Analyzer Mode. ...

  • Page 55: Next Window

    1  About the Analyzer Window Control Keys Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow:FORMat:TILE Example :DISP:WIND:FORM:ZOOM sets zoomed :DISP:WIND:FORM:TILE sets un-zoomed Preset TILE Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Next Window Selects the next window of the current view.When the Next Window key is pressed, the next window in the order of precedencebecomes selected. ...

  • Page 56: Full Screen

    In ESA/PSA, Full Screen was turned on with a softkey, so pressing any other key turned Full Screen Notes off.  In the X-Series, because a hardkey is provided to turn this function on and off, pressing any other key no longer turns off Full Screen Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00...
  • Page 57 1  About the Analyzer Window Control Keys • and you are in local operation, the display can be turned back on by pressing any key or by sending the SYSTem:DEFaults MISC command or the DISPlay:ENABle ON (neither *RST nor SYSTem:PRESet enable the display.) •...

  • Page 58: Mouse And Keyboard Control

    1  About the Analyzer Mouse and Keyboard Control Mouse and Keyboard Control If you do not have access to the instrument front-panel, there are several ways that a mouse and PC Keyboard can give you access to functions normally accessed using the front-panel keys. Right-Click If you plug in a mouse and right-click on the analyzer screen, a menu will appear as below: Placing the mouse on one of the rows marked with a right arrow symbol will cause that row to expand, as...
  • Page 59 1  About the Analyzer Mouse and Keyboard Control This method can be used to access any of the front-panel keys by using a mouse; as for example if you are accessing the instrument through Remote Desktop. The array of keys thus available is shown below: EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 60: Pc Keyboard

    1  About the Analyzer Mouse and Keyboard Control PC Keyboard If you have a PC keyboard plugged in (or via Remote Desktop), certain key codes on the PC keyboard map to front-panel keys on the GPSA front panel. These key codes are shown below: Front-panel key Key code Frequency...
  • Page 61 1  About the Analyzer Mouse and Keyboard Control Front-panel key Key code Full Screen CTRL+SHIFT+B Return CTRL+SHIFT+R Mute Mute Inc Audio Volume Up Dec Audio Volume Down Help Control CTRL Enter Return Cancel Delete Backspace Backspace Select Space Up Arrow Down Arrow Down Left Arrow...
  • Page 62 1  About the Analyzer Mouse and Keyboard Control This is a pictorial view of the table: EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 63: Instrument Security & Memory Volatility

    United States Department of Defense, or other similar authorities. For X-Series analyzers, this information is contained in the document "Security Features and Document of Volatility". This document is not included in the Documentation CD, or the instrument's on-disk library, but it may be downloaded from Keysight's web site.
  • Page 64 1  About the Analyzer Instrument Security & Memory Volatility EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 65: About The Emi Receiver Measurement Application

    Application This section provides information on using the EMI Receiver Mode in your X-Series Signal Analyzer or your MXE EMI Receiver. The MXE EMI Receiver allows you to make fully CISPR compliant measurements. The X-Series signal analyzers allow you to make...
  • Page 66 2  About the EMI Receiver Measurement Application EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 67: Programming The Analyzer

    Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer EMI Receiver Mode Reference 3 Programming the Analyzer This section provides introductory information about the programming documentation included with your product. "What Programming Information is Available?" on page 68 "STATus Subsystem " on page 98 "IEEE 488.2 Common Commands" on page 140...

  • Page 68: What Programming Information Is Available

    The X-Series Documentation can be accessed through the Additional Documentation page in the instrument Help system and is included on the Documentation DVD shipped with the instrument. It can also be found online at: http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa_manuals. The following resources are available to help you create programs for automating your X-Series measurements: Resource...

  • Page 69: List Of Scpi Commands

    3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands List of SCPI Commands *CAL? *CLS *ESE <integer> *ESE? *ESR? *IDN? *OPC *OPC? *OPT? *RCL <register#> *RST *SAV <register#> *SRE <integer> *SRE? *STB? *TRG *TST? *WAI ABORt CALCulate:APD:LLINe:ALL:DELete CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:COMMent "string" CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:COMMent ? CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:DELete CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:DESCription "string"...
  • Page 70 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:TRACe? CALCulate:APD:MARKer:AOFF CALCulate:APD:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 CALCulate:APD:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]? CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:MAXimum CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:MODE POSition | DELTa | OFF CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:MODE? CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:REFerence <integer> CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:REFerence? CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12[:SET]:SLISt CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TRACe MEAS | MEAS2 | ELIMit CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TRACe? CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:X <rel_ampl> CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:X? CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:Y? CALCulate:APD:SLISt:APPend...
  • Page 71 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands CALCulate:DANalyzer:MARKer[1]|2|...|12[:SET]:DELTa:SPAN CALCulate:DANalyzer:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TRACe 1 | 2 CALCulate:DANalyzer:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TRACe? CALCulate:DANalyzer:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:X <real> CALCulate:DANalyzer:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:X? CALCulate:DANalyzer:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:Y? CALCulate:DANalyzer:TABLe:DISPlay OFF | ON | 0 | 1 CALCulate:DANalyzer:TABLe:DISPlay? CALCulate:DATA<n>:COMPress? BLOCk | CFIT | MAXimum | MINimum | MEAN | DMEan | RMS | RMSCubed | SAMPle | SDEViation | PPHase[, <soffset>[, <length>[, <roffset>[, <rlimit>]]]] CALCulate:DATA[n]? CALCulate:DATA[1]|2|...|6:PEAKs? <threshold>, <excursion>[, AMPLitude |...
  • Page 72 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE? CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:CONTrol:POINts? CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:COPY LLINE1 | LLINE2 | LLINE3 | LLINE4 | LLINE5 | LLINE6 CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:DELete CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:DESCription "string" CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:DESCription? CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:DISPlay ON | OFF | 1 | 0 CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:DISPlay? CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:FAIL? CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:FREQuency:CMODe:RELative ON | OFF | 1 | 0 CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:FREQuency:CMODe:RELative? CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:MARGin <rel_ampl>...
  • Page 73 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold? CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe? CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:REFerence <integer> CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:REFerence? CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12[:SET]:METer CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12[:SET]:SLISt CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TO:METer CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TRACe 1 | 2 | 3 CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TRACe? CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:X <real> CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:X? CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:Y? CALCulate:FSCan:SCAN:DISPlay G1 | G2 | OFF CALCulate:FSCan:SCAN:DISPlay? CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:APPend:METer CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:DELete:ALL...
  • Page 74 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands CALCulate[1]|2:LIMit[1]|2|...|6:FAIL? CALCulate[1]|2:LIMit[1]|2|...|6:NAME CALCulate[1]|2:LIMit[1]|2|...|6:NAME CALCulate[1]|2:LIMit[1]|2|...|6:STATe CALCulate[1]|2:LIMit[1]|2|...|6:STATe CALCulate:LIMit[1]|2|...|6:UPPer[:DATA] CALCulate:LIMit[1]|2|...|6:UPPer[:DATA] CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:AMPLitude:CMODe:RELative ON | OFF | 1 | 0 CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:AMPLitude:CMODe:RELative? CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE LOGarithmic | LINear CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE? CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:BUILd TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:COMMent ? CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:COMMent "string" CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:CONTrol[:DATA] <x>, <x>, ...
  • Page 75 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4[:STATe]? CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4[:STATe]? CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4[:STATe]? CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4:X <value> CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4:X <value> CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4:X <value> CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4:X? CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4:X? CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4:X? CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4:Y? CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4:Y? CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4:Y? CALCulate:METer:LIMit:ALL:FAIL? CALCulate:METer[1]|2|3:LIMit[:DATA] <ampl> CALCulate:METer[1]|2|3:LIMit[:DATA]? CALCulate:METer[1]|2|3:LIMit:FAIL? CALCulate:METer[1]|2|3:LIMit:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 CALCulate:METer[1]|2|3:LIMit:STATe? CALCulate:METer:POWer[:CURRent]? CALCulate:METer:POWer:PEAK?
  • Page 76 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:ADD <NumericValue> CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:CLEar[:IMMediate] CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate] CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod SUBRange | PEAK CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges <integer> CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges? CALCulate:SCHart:LIMit:FAIL? CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer:AOFF CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]? CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:PREVious:ZOOM CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:ZOOM CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:ZOOM:CLEar CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:ZOOM:OUT CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MAXimum CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MAXimum:NEXT CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MINimum CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE POSition | DELTa | OFF CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE? CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:REFerence <integer>...
  • Page 77 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands CALibration:AUTO ON | PARTial | OFF CALibration:AUTO ALERt CALibration:AUTO? CALibration:AUTO:ALERt TTEMperature | DAY | WEEK | NONE CALibration:AUTO:ALERt? CALibration:AUTO:MODE ALL | NRF CALibration:AUTO:MODE? CALibration:AUTO:TIME:OFF? CALibration:DATA:BACKup <filename> CALibration:DATA:DEFault CALibration:DATA:RESTore <filename> CALibration:EXPired? CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse <integer> CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse? CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:FINE <integer>...
  • Page 78 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:RECurrence DAY | WEEK | OFF CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:RECurrence? CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:RECurrence:DAY SUN | MON | TUE | WED | THU | FRI | SAT CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:RECurrence:DAY? CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:RECurrence:WEEK <integer> CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:RECurrence:WEEK? CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:STATe ON | OFF | 0 | 1 CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:STATe? CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:TASK T1 | T2 | T3 CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:TASK?
  • Page 79 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands DISPlay:ANNotation:MBAR[:STATe]? DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe]? DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe]? DISPlay:APD:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision <rel_ampl> DISPlay:APD:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision? DISPlay:APD:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> DISPlay:APD:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:RLEVel? DISPlay:BACKlight ON | OFF DISPlay:BACKlight? DISPlay:BACKlight:INTensity <integer> DISPlay:BACKlight:INTensity? DISPlay:DANalyzer:VIEW:DISTurbance:ILINe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 DISPlay:DANalyzer:VIEW:DISTurbance:ILINe?
  • Page 80 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel? DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl> DISPlay:MONitor:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet? DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW:EXPand:METer[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW:EXPand:METer[:STATe]? DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:FULL DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:MAX:DURation <time> DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:MAX:DURation? DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision <time> DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision? DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:RLEVel <time> DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:RLEVel? DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <rel_ampl> DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision? DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel? DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl> DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet? DISPlay:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic:DISPlay:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]::TRACe:X:SPACing?
  • Page 81 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]|2|3:Y[:SCALe]:TOP? DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]|2|3:Y[:SCALe]:TOP? DISPlay:WINDow1|WINDow2:TRACe[1]|2|3:MODE DISPlay:WINDow1|WINDow2:TRACe[1]|2|3:MODE? FETCh:APD[n]? FETCh:DANalyzer [n]? FETCh:FSCan[n]? FETCh:MONitor[n]? FETCh:SCHart [n]? FORMat:BORDer NORMal | SWAPped FORMat:BORDer? FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ASCii | INTeger, 32 | REAL, 32 | REAL, 64 FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]? GLOBal:DEFault GLOBal:FREQuency:CENTer[:STATe] 1 | 0 | ON | OFF GLOBal:FREQuency:CENTer[:STATe]? HCOPy:ABORt HCOPy[:IMMediate]...
  • Page 82 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands INITiate:RESume INITiate:RESume INITiate:SCHart INPut<1|2>:PRESelection[:STATe] ON | OFF INPut<1|2>:PRESelection[:STATe]? INPut<1|2>:TYPE INPUT1 | INPUT2 INPut<1|2>:TYPE? INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation:AUTO INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation:PROTection INPut:COUPling AC | DC INPut:COUPling? INPut:COUPling:I|Q DC | LFR1 | LFR2 INPut:COUPling:I|Q? INPut[1]|2:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF INPut[1]|2:GAIN[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 INPut[1]|2:GAIN[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 INPut[1]|2:GAIN[:STATe]?
  • Page 83 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer ALL | NONE INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer? INSTrument:NSELect <integer> INSTrument:NSELect? INSTrument[:SELect] RECeiver INSTrument[:SELect] SANalyzer INSTrument[:SELect] ‘SA’ | ’PNOISE’ | ’EDGE’ | ’GSM’ | ’BASIC’ INSTrument[:SELect] SA | RTSA | SEQAN | EMI | BASIC | WCDMA | EDGEGSM | WIMAXOFDMA | VSA | PNOISE | NFIGure | ADEMOD | BTooth | TDSCDMA | CDMA2K | CDMA1XEV | LTE | LTETDD | LTEAFDD | LTEATDD | MSR | DVB | DTMB | DCATV | ISDBT | CMMB | WLAN | CWLAN | CWIMAXOFDM | WIMAXFIXED | IDEN | RLC |...
  • Page 84 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name> MMEMory:MOVE <string>, <string>[, <string>, <string>] MMEMory:RDIRectory <directory_name> MMEMory:REGister:STATe:LABel <regnumber>, "label" MMEMory:REGister:STATe:LABel? <regnumber> MMEMory:RESults:CLIent "string" MMEMory:RESults:CLIent? MMEMory:RESults:COMMent "string" MMEMory:RESults:COMMent? MMEMory:RESults:CORRection:MODE OFF | DESCription | DATA MMEMory:RESults:CORRection:MODE? MMEMory:RESults:DLISt ON | OFF | 0 | 1 MMEMory:RESults:DLISt? MMEMory:RESults:LIMits:MODE OFF | DESCription | DATA MMEMory:RESults:LIMits:MODE?
  • Page 85 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands MMEMory:STORe:SCReen:THEMe? MMEMory:STORe:SLISt <filename> MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1, <filename> MMEMory:STORe:STATe <filename> MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:DATA TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | ALL, <filename> MMEMory:TRACe:CLIent "string" MMEMory:TRACe:CLIent? MMEMory:TRACe:CLIent:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 MMEMory:TRACe:CLIent:STATe? MMEMory:TRACe:OPERator "string" MMEMory:TRACe:OPERator? MMEMory:TRACe:OPERator:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 MMEMory:TRACe:OPERator:STATe? MMEMory:TRACe:PDEScription "string"...
  • Page 86 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <freq> [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]? [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]? [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO? [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO? [:SENSe:]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE DB3 | DB6 | IMPulse | NOISe [:SENSe:]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:TYPE? [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:GAIN <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:GAIN? [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:LOSS <rel_ampl>...
  • Page 87 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands [:SENSe]:CORRection:SA[:RF]:GAIN? [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CLICk:CORRection <rel_amptd> [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CLICk:CORRection? [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CLICk:COUNt <integer> [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CLICk:COUNt? [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CLICk:COUNt:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CLICk:COUNt:STATe? [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CRATe? [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CRATe:<integer> [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CRATe:TYPe MEASured | USER [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:CRATe:TYPe? [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:FREQuency F150KHZ | F500KHZ | F1400KHZ | F30MHZ | MANual [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:FREQuency? [:SENSe]:DANalyzer:FREQuency:MANual <freq>...
  • Page 88 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt:AUTO? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP <frequency> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 | 0 | 1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP:AUTO? [:SENSe]:FSCan:DEMod AM | FM | PM | OFF [:SENSe]:FSCan:DEMod? [:SENSe]:FSCan:DEMod:FM:DEEMphasis OFF | US25 | US50 | US75 | US750 [:SENSe]:FSCan:DEMod:FM:DEEMphasis?
  • Page 89 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:POWer:GAIN:BAND? [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:POWer:GAIN[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:POWer:GAIN[:STATe]? [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:PRBW <integer> [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:PRBW? [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:RULes PRBW | LPCT [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:RULes? [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STARt <freq> [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STARt? [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STATe? [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STEP <freq> [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STEP? [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STEP:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STEP:AUTO?
  • Page 90 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands [:SENSe]:METer[1]|2|3:DETector POSitive | QPEak | EAVerage | RAVerage | AVERage | NEGative [:SENSe]:METer[1]|2|3:DETector? [:SENSe]:METer:DETector:DWELl <time> [:SENSe]:METer:DETector:DWELl? [:SENSe]:METer:GAIN:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:METer:GAIN:AUTO? [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:ADJustable <time> [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:ADJustable? [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:RESet [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:TYPE INFinite | ADJustable [:SENSe]:METer:PHOLd:TYPE? [:SENSe]:MONitor:DEMod AM | FM | OFF [:SENSe]:MONitor:DEMod?
  • Page 91 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands [:SENSe]:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:INPut:TYPE? [:SENSe]:SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt] <integer> [:SENSe]:SCAN:RANGes[:COUNt]? [:SENSe]:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STARt [:SENSe]:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STEP [:SENSe]:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:STOP [:SENSe]:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:TIME [:SENSe]:SCHart:ABORt [:SENSe]:SCHart:DEMod AM | FM | PM | OFF [:SENSe]:SCHart:DEMod? [:SENSe]:SCHart:DEMod:FM:DEEMphasis OFF | US25 | US50 | US75 | US750 [:SENSe]:SCHart:DEMod:FM:DEEMphasis? SENSe1|SENSe2:DEMod SENSe1|SENSe2:DEMod OFF | AM | FM SENSe1|SENSe2:DETector[1]|2|3[:FUNCtion] SENSe1|SENSe2:FREQuency:MODE STEPped | SWEpt | TDOMain SENSe1|SENSe2:FREQuency:STARt...
  • Page 92 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:FMEasurement:LISN[:TYPE] FOURphase | ESH2Z5 | ENV216 | OFF SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:FMEasurement:LISN[:TYPE]? SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:FREQuency:FIXed SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:SWEep:TIME SENSe1|SENSe2:SWEep:COUNt [:SENSe]:SLISt:COMMent <integer>, "string" [:SENSe]:SLISt:COMMent? <integer> [:SENSe]:SWEep:COUNt STATus:OPERation:CONDition? STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer> STATus:OPERation:ENABle? STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer> STATus:OPERation:NTRansition? STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer> STATus:OPERation:PTRansition? STATus:PRESet STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <integer>...
  • Page 93 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle? STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <integer> STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle? STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <integer> STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition? STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <integer> STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition? STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle <integer> STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle? STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition <integer> STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition? STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition <integer> STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition? STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:ENABle <integer> STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:ENABle? STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:NTRansition <integer> STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:NTRansition? STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:PTRansition <integer>...
  • Page 94 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition? SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog[:NAME]? SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog[:NAME]:COUNt? SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog:OPTion? <model> SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog:REVision? <model> SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent][:NAME]? SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent]:OPTion? SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent]:REVision? SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[1][:SELF]:ADDRess <integer> SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[1][:SELF]:ADDRess? SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[1][:SELF]:CONTroller[:ENABle] ON | OFF | 0 | 1 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[1][:SELF]:CONTroller[:ENABle]? SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:HISLip:ENABle OFF | ON | 0 | 1 SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:HISLip:ENABle? SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:SICL:ENABle OFF | ON | 0 | 1 SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:SICL:ENABle? SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:SOCKet:CONTrol? SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:SOCKet:ENABle OFF | ON | 0 | 1...
  • Page 95 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands SYSTem:PON:MODE SA | BASIC | ADEMOD | NFIGURE | PNOISE | CDMA2K | TDSCDMA | VSA | VSA89601 | WCDMA | WIMAXOFDMA SYSTem:PON:MODE? SYSTem:PON:TIME? SYSTem:PON:TYPE MODE | USER | LAST SYSTem:PON:TYPE PRESet SYSTem:PON:TYPE? SYSTem:PRESet SYSTem:PRESet:USER...
  • Page 96 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands TRACe:SCHart:CLEar TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 TRACe:SCHart:CLEar:ALL TRIGger:<measurement>[:SEQuence]:IQ:SOURce EXTernal1 | EXTernal2 | IMMediate | IQMag | IDEMod | QDEMod | IINPut | QINPut | AIQMag TRIGger:<measurement>[:SEQuence]:IQ:SOURce? TRIGger:<measurement>[:SEQuence]:RF:SOURce EXTernal1 | EXTernal2 | IMMediate | LINE | FRAMe | RFBurst | VIDeo | IF | ALARm | LAN | TV TRIGger:<measurement>[:SEQuence]:RF:SOURce? TRIGger:<measurement>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal1 | EXTernal2 | IMMediate | LINE | FRAMe | RFBurst | VIDeo | IF | ALARm | LAN | IQMag | IDEMod |...
  • Page 97 3  Programming the Analyzer List of SCPI Commands TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:LEVel? TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:SLOPe NEGative | POSitive TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:SLOPe? TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet <time> TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet? TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet:STATe? TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe? TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURCe EXTernal TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay <time> TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay? TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay:STATe? TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <ampl>...

  • Page 98: Status Subsystem

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem STATus Subsystem The following diagram provides a graphical overview of the entire X-Series Status Register System. For readability, the diagram is split into two sections: "X-Series Status Register System (1) " on page 99 "X-Series Status Register System (2) "...
  • Page 99 3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem X-Series Status Register System (1) EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 100: Detailed Description

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem X-Series Status Register System (2) Detailed Description The STATus subsystem remote commands set and query the status hardware registers. This system of registers monitors various events and conditions in the instrument. Software written to control the instrument may need to monitor some of these events and conditions.

  • Page 101: What Are Status Registers

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem What Are Status Registers The status system contains multiple registers that are arranged in a hierarchical order. The lower-level status registers propagate their data to the higher-level registers in the data structures by means of summary bits.

  • Page 102: How To Use The Status Registers

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem • *OPC, *OPC? (operation complete) sets the standard event status register to monitor the completion of all commands. The query stops any new commands from being processed until the current processing is complete, then returns a ‘1’. •...

  • Page 103: Using A Status Register

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Do this by querying the condition registers which continuously monitor status. These registers represent the current state of the instrument. Bits in a condition register are updated in real time. When the condition monitored by a particular bit becomes true, the bit is set to 1. When the condition becomes false, the bit is reset to 0.

  • Page 104: Using The Service Request (Srq) Method

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem 2. The results of a query are evaluated in a similar way. If the *STB? command returns a decimal value of 140, (140 = 128 + 8 + 4) then bit 7 is true, bit 3 is true and bit 2 is true. Example 2: 1.

  • Page 105: Status Register System

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem When a register set causes a summary bit in the status byte to change from 0 to 1, the instrument can initiate the service request (SRQ) process. However, the process is only initiated if both of the following conditions are true: •...

  • Page 106: The Status Byte Register

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem The Status Byte Register The RQS bit is read and reset by a serial poll. The same bit position (MSS) is read, non-destructively by the *STB? command. If you serial poll bit 6 it is read as RQS, but if you send *STB it reads bit 6 as MSS. For more information refer to IEEE 488.2 standards, section 11.
  • Page 107 3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Description 0, 1 These bits are always set to 0. A 1 in this bit position indicates that the SCPI error queue is not empty which means that it contains at least one error message. A 1 in this bit position indicates that the data questionable summary bit has been set.

  • Page 108: Standard Event Status Register

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem bit 6) to your numeric sum when you enable any bits for a service request. The command *SRE? returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the *SRE <integer> command. The service request enable register presets to zeros (0).
  • Page 109 3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Description A 1 in this bit position indicates that all pending operations were completed following execution of the *OPC command. This bit is for GPIB handshaking to request control. Currently it is set to 0 because there are no implementations where the spectrum analyzer controls another instrument.

  • Page 110: Operation And Questionable Status Registers

    They are initiated by keys under the MEASURE key or with the MEASure group of commands. The bit is valid for most X-Series Modes. Waiting for trigger The instrument is waiting for the trigger conditions to be met, then it will trigger a sweep or measurement.

  • Page 111: Status Subsystem Command Descriptions

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Power summary The instrument hardware has detected a power unleveled condition. Temperature summary The instrument is still warming up. Frequency summary The instrument hardware has detected an unlocked condition or a problem with the external frequency reference. Calibration summary The instrument has detected a hardware problem while doing the automatic internal alignment process.

  • Page 112: Operation Enable

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Operation Enable This command determines which bits in the Operation Event register, will set the Operation Status Summary bit (bit 7) in the Status Byte Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.

  • Page 113: Operation Positive Transition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Mode Remote Command :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer> :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition? Example STAT:OPER:NTR 1 Align Now operation complete will be reported to the Status Byte Register. Preset 32767 Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Operation Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1).

  • Page 114: Questionable Register

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Questionable Register "Questionable Condition " on page 114 "Questionable Enable " on page 114 "Questionable Event Query " on page 115 "Questionable Negative Transition " on page 115 "Questionable Positive Transition" on page 115 Questionable Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Condition register.

  • Page 115: Questionable Event Query

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Questionable Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.

  • Page 116: Questionable Calibration Register

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:PTR 16 Temperature summary ‘questionable asserted’ will be reported to the Status Byte Register. Preset 32767 32767 Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Register "Questionable Calibration Condition "...

  • Page 117: Questionable Calibration Event Query

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Mode Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:ENAB 16384 Can be used to query if an alignment is needed, if you have turned off the automatic alignment process. 32767 Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Event Query...

  • Page 118: Questionable Calibration Positive Transition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem 32767 Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1).

  • Page 119: Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Example STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP:COND? Preset Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Event register, which also sets bit 11 of the Questionable Calibration Register.

  • Page 120: Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0).

  • Page 121: Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem "Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition " on page 122 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition register. The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.

  • Page 122: Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Mode Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure[:EVENt]? Example STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL? Preset Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0).

  • Page 123: Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Register

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Register "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition " on page 123 "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Enable " on page 123 "Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query "...

  • Page 124: Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem 32767 Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event register.

  • Page 125: Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive Transition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1).

  • Page 126: Questionable Frequency Enable

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Questionable Frequency Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register, which also sets the Frequency Summary bit (bit 5) in the Questionable Register.

  • Page 127: Questionable Frequency Positive Transition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:FREQ:NTR 2 Frequency Reference ‘regained lock’ will be reported to the Frequency Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Frequency Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the...

  • Page 128: Questionable Integrity Enable

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions. Mode Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:INT:COND? Preset Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register, which also sets the Integrity Summary bit (bit 9) in the Questionable Register.

  • Page 129: Questionable Integrity Negative Transition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Questionable Integrity Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0) The variable <integer>...

  • Page 130: Questionable Integrity Signal Condition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem "Questionable Integrity Signal Enable" on page 130 "Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query" on page 131 "Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition" on page 131 "Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition" on page 131 Questionable Integrity Signal Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition register.

  • Page 131: Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register. The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.

  • Page 132: Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Register

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Mode Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:PTRansition <integer> :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:PTRansition? Example STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN:PTR 4 Burst not found will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 32767 Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Register "Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition "...

  • Page 133: Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Mode Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle? Example STAT:QUES:INT:UNC:ENAB 1 Oversweep (Meas Uncal) will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 32767 Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event...

  • Page 134: Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Preset 32767 Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1).

  • Page 135: Questionable Power Enable

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Mode Remote Command :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? Example STAT:QUES:POW:COND? Preset Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Questionable Power Enable This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Power Event register, which also sets the Power Summary bit (bit 3) in the Questionable Register.

  • Page 136: Questionable Power Negative Transition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Questionable Power Negative Transition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0).

  • Page 137: Questionable Temperature Condition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem "Questionable Temperature Enable" on page 137 "Questionable Temperature Event Query" on page 137 "Questionable Temperature Negative Transition" on page 138 "Questionable Temperature Positive Transition" on page 138 Questionable Temperature Condition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition register.

  • Page 138: Questionable Temperature Negative Transition

    3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is cleared Mode Remote Command...
  • Page 139 3  Programming the Analyzer STATus Subsystem Temperature Summary of the Status Questionable register. Preset 32767 32767 Status Bits/OPC Sequential command dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 140: Ieee 488.2 Common Commands

    3  Programming the Analyzer IEEE 488.2 Common Commands IEEE 488.2 Common Commands The instrument supports the following subset of IEEE 488.2 Common Commands, as defined in Chapter 10 IEEE Standard 488.2–1992. As indicated in the detailed descriptions, some of these commands correspond directly to instrument front-panel key functionality, while others are available only as remote commands.
  • Page 141 3  Programming the Analyzer IEEE 488.2 Common Commands alignment was able to succeed on all portions but unable to align the RF because of an interfering signal, the resultant will be the success value. Successful completion of Align Now, All will clear the “Align Now, All required” Error Condition, and clear bit 14 in the Status Questionable Calibration register.

  • Page 142: Clear Status

    Resets all bits in all event registers to 0, which resets all the status byte register bits to 0 also. dependencies Backwards Compatibility In general the status bits used in the X-Series status system will be backwards compatible with ESA Notes and PSA. However, note that all conditions will generate events that go into the event log, and some will also generate status bits.

  • Page 143: Standard Event Status Register Query

    3  Programming the Analyzer IEEE 488.2 Common Commands dependent error, status execution error, command error, and power on. The selected bits are OR’d to become a summary bit (bit 5) in the byte register which can be queried. The query returns the state of the standard event status enable register. Key Path No equivalent key.

  • Page 144: Operation Complete

    1. The ESA/PSA/VSA products do not meet all the requirements for the *OPC command specified by Notes IEEE 488.2. This is corrected for X-Series. This will sometimes cause behavior that is not backward compatible, but it will work as customers expect.

  • Page 145: Query Instrument Options

    3  Programming the Analyzer IEEE 488.2 Common Commands Measuring: monitored by PSA and ESA (but not in all Modes). Paused: monitored by VSA (E4406A). Printing: monitored by VSA (E4406A). Mass memory busy: monitored by VSA (E4406A). Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Query Instrument Options Returns a string of all the installed instrument options.

  • Page 146: Rst (Remote Command Only)

    *RST gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set. Backwards Compatibility In legacy analyzers *RST did not set the analyzer to Single, but in the X-Series it does, for compliance Notes with the IEEE 488.2 specification.

  • Page 147: Status Byte Query

    3  Programming the Analyzer IEEE 488.2 Common Commands Notes For related commands, see the STATus subsystem and SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? commands. Preset Status Bits/OPC Service Request Enable Register (all bits, 0 – 7). dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Status Byte Query Returns the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents.

  • Page 148: Wait-To-Continue

    3  Programming the Analyzer IEEE 488.2 Common Commands Wait-to-Continue This command causes the instrument to wait until all overlapped commands are completed before executing any additional commands. There is no query form for the command. Remote Command *WAI Example INIT:CONT OFF; INIT;*WAI Sets the instrument to single sweep. Starts a sweep and waits for its completion.
  • Page 149 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer EMI Receiver Mode Reference 4 Input/Output Functions...

  • Page 150: Input/Output

    In the PSA the calibrator was one of the inputs and selected using the AREF parameter to the same :FEED command that switched the inputs.  In the X-Series it is controlled in a separate menu and overrides the input selection.  For code compatibility the [:SENSe]:FEED AREFerence command is provided, and is aliased to [SENSe]:FEED:AREF REF50, which causes the input to be switched to the 50 MHz calibrator. ...

  • Page 151: Input/Output Variables - Preset Behavior

    INP:MIX INT INP:MIX? Notes In legacy analyzers you choose between the Internal mixer or an External Mixer.  In the X-Series, the External Mixer is one of the choices for the Input and is selected using the FEED command (:SENSe:FEED EXTMixer).

  • Page 152: Rf Input

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output by one of the three ways: • by using the Restore Input/Output Defaults key on the first page of the input/output menu, • by using the System->Restore System Defaults->Input/Output Settings or, • by using the System -> Restore System Defaults->All. Also, they survive a Preset and a Power cycle. A very few of the Input/Output settings do respond to a Mode Preset;...

  • Page 153: Rf Coupling

    In AC coupling mode, you can view signals below the corner frequency of the DC block, but below a certain frequency the amplitude accuracy is not specified. The frequency below which specifications do not apply Lowest Freq for Lowest Freq for meeting specs when meeting specs when X-Series Model AC coupled DC coupled N9000A–503/507 100 kHz N9000A-C75 Input 2 1 MHz N9000A–513/526...

  • Page 154: Rf Input Port

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output When operating in DC coupled mode, ensure protection of the analyzer input circuitry by limiting the DC part of the input level to within 200 mV of 0 Vdc. In AC or DC coupling, limit the input RF power to +30 dBm (1 Watt).

  • Page 155: Rf Input

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Compatibility SCPI INPut<1|2>:TYPE? Included for R&S ESU compatibility. In the MXE, the INPUT1 parameter is aliased to RFIN and the INPUT2 parameter is aliased to RFIN2 Initial S/W Revision A.05.01 Modified at S/W Revision A.14.00 RF Input Specifies using the main RF port for the current measurement Key Path Input/Output, RF Input, RF Input Port...

  • Page 156: Rf Preselector

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Nominal Input 2 Max Absolute Input Model Freq 2 Max Freq Transition rule for switching from Input 1 to Input 2 • If the Stop Freq is above 1.000025 GHz, it is set to N9038A 1 GHz 1.000025 GHz 1.000025 GHz, otherwise it does not change. ...

  • Page 157: Baseband I/Q (Option Bba)

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output This key only appears in models that support the RF Preselector, in other models, setting or querying the SCPI will generate an error. Preset It is set to Off when the selected mode is SA. If the selected mode is EMI Receiver, then it will be set to On.
  • Page 158 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output The Agilent 113x Series active probes can be used for both single ended and differential measurements.  In either case a single connection is made for each channel (on either the I or Q input). The input is automatically configured to 50 Ω...

  • Page 159: Baseband I/Q Remote Language Compatibility

    B7C to function properly with the X-Series. The X-Series has hardware differences and additional capabilities (e.g., E4406A does not have independent settings of I & Q nor does it provide for probe calibrations) which make 100% compatibility impossible.

  • Page 160: I/Q Path

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output INPut<1|2>:IQ:TYPE I | Q | IQ INPut<1|2>:IQ:IMPedance LOW | HIGH Not Supported: INPut<1|2>:SELect AIQ | RF TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:FORMat COMPatible | IQBLock | IQPair> TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? <offset samples>,<# of samples> TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA? TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SET <filter type>,<rbw>,<sample rate>,<trigger source>,<trigger slope>, <pretrigger samples>, <# of samples> TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SRATe 10.0kHz to 81.6MHz TRACe<1|2>:IQ[:STATe] ON|OFF The Rohde &...

  • Page 161: I+Jq

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output FEED:IQ:TYPE IQ Preset State Saved This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All" Range I+jQ | I Only | Q Only Readback Text I+jQ | I Only | Q Only Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00...

  • Page 162: I Differential Input

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output imaginary part will always be zero, but for any other center frequency both the real and imaginary parts will be significant. Note that since the receiver's real output is displayed as the "I" data, when the center frequency is 0, the Q Only input appears as the "I"...
  • Page 163 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Range Off | On Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command :INPut[1]:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 :INPut[1]:IQ:BALanced[:STATe]? Notes For R&S FSQ-B71 compatibility, with no independent settings for the I and Q channels. Therefore, it is tied only to the I channel and does not provide an equivalent for the Q channel. For proper operation of the backwards compatibility command Q Same as I should be set to On.
  • Page 164 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output I Skew Sets the skew factor for the I channel.  The skew will shift the channel's data in time. Use this to compensate for differences in the electrical lengths of the input paths due to cabling. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup Remote Command...
  • Page 165 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Notes Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged. When the IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q probe attenuation setting must match the I Probe attenuation setting within 1 dB. ...
  • Page 166 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Clear Calibration Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe. It does not clear the data for other probe types or other ports. If the sensed probe has EEPROM identification, only the data for that specific probe is cleared.

  • Page 167: Q Differential Input

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Differential Input (when not determined by probe) Input Z (when not determined by probe) Preset This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value (Q Same as I set to "On") on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults"...
  • Page 168 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Q Input Z Selects the input impedance for the Q channel. The impedance applies to both the Q and Q-bar ports. The input impedance controls the hardware signal path impedance match. It is not used for converting voltage to power.
  • Page 169 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output +100 ns Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Q Probe Accesses the probe setup parameters for the Q channel. See"I/Q Probe Setup" on page 172. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup State Saved Readback Text [<Q port probe id>] This is reporting the type of probe sensed on the Q port.
  • Page 170 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output This is an alternate form of the SCPI that allows input as a power instead of a ratio. Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation? Example Set the attenuation for the current I probe type to 100.00:1. CORR:IQ:I:ATT 20 dB Range –60 dB to +80 dB –60 dB...

  • Page 171: Reference Z

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output :CAL:IQ:PROBe:I:CLE Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Reference Z Sets the value of the impedance to be used in converting voltage to power for the I and Q channels. This does not change the hardware's path impedance (see "I Input Z"...

  • Page 172: I/Q Probe Setup

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output process only from the time the "Next" button is pressed until the next screen is shown. For SCPI, this corresponds to the time from issuing the CAL:IQ:FLAT:I|IB|Q|QB command until the operation is complete. For example, if the prior instrument state is Cal Out = Off, Input = I+jQ, and Differential = Off, then up until the time the "Next"...

  • Page 173: Offset

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Example Set the attenuation for the current I probe to 100.00:1. CORR:IQ:I:ATT:RAT 100 Notes Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged.

  • Page 174: Coupling

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Notes Only some probe types support Offset. For those that do, each probe type has its own Offset setting. As probes are changed the Offset value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the Offset affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged. Preset State Saved Saved with probe calibration data.

  • Page 175: Calibrate

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output LFR1 Turns on low frequency rejection, rejecting signal component lower than 1.7 Hz. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling Example Turn on low frequency rejection on the I channel for frequencies lower than 1.7 Hz INP:COUP:I LFR1 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00...

  • Page 176: Rf Calibrator

    In the ESA the calibrator was a separate output which you connected to the input and switched on with this command.  In the X-Series, the ON parameter is aliased to the [SENSe]:FEED:AREF REF50 command and the OFF parameter is aliased to [SENSe]:FEED:AREF OFF.
  • Page 177 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output When CALibration:SOURce:STATe? is received, 1 will be returned if any of the references is selected and 0 if the Calibrator is "Off" Preset Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 50 MHz Selects the 50 MHz internal reference as the input signal. Key Path Input/Output, RF Calibrator Example...

  • Page 178: External Gain

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output External Gain Compensates for gain or loss in the measurement system outside the spectrum analyzer. The External Gain is subtracted from the amplitude readout (or the loss is added to the amplitude readout). So, the displayed signal level represents the signal level at the output of the device-under-test, which can be the input of an external device that provides gain or loss.

  • Page 179: More Information

    A.14.00 More Information The U7227A USB Preamplifier is an accessory for the X-Series Signal Analyzer that provides gain externally, and whose gain settings are automatically loaded into the analyzer over USB whenever it is connected to one of the analyzer’s USB ports.
  • Page 180 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Overload detection and reporting will apply when the USB preamplifier is connected to USB.  The USB Preamplifier has its own overload detector which reports overloads to the instrument over USB. This generates an error condition, “Input Overload;USB Preamp.” If, while the USB Preamp is connected to USB, a measurement is selected that does not support the USB preamplifier, the "No result;...
  • Page 181 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Sets an external attenuation value for BTS (Base Transceiver Station) tests. Key Path Input/Output, External Gain Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:GAIN <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:GAIN? Example CORR:BTS:GAIN 10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB CORR:BTS:GAIN –10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB (that is, a loss of 10 dB.) Notes Does not auto return.
  • Page 182 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output I Ext Gain This function affects the I channel input. However, when Q Gain in I+jQ is set to Same as I Gain, this value is applied to both I and Q channel inputs. Key Path Input/Output, External Gain Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:GAIN <rel_ampl>...

  • Page 183: Restore Input/Output Defaults

    Amplitude Corrections arrays can be entered, sent over SCPI, or loaded from a file.  They allow you to correct the response of the analyzer for various use cases.  The X-series supports four separate Corrections arrays, each of which can contain up to 2000 points.  They can be turned on and off individually and any or all can be on at the same time.

  • Page 184: Select Correction

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Mode SA, I/Q Analyzer, Phase Noise, VXA, RTSA, EMI Receiver, DVB-T/H, DTMB, DVB-T/H, DTMB, W- CDMA, LTE & LTE-Adv FDD, LTE & LTE-Adv TDD, Sequence Analyzer, BTooth Dependencies This key will only appear if you have the proper option installed in your instrument. Amplitude correction may not be available in all modes;...

  • Page 185: Properties

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Example SENS:CORR:CSET1 ON Dependencies Changing this from the OFF state to the ON state automatically turns on "Apply Corrections". Only the first correction array (Correction 1) supports antenna units.  When this array is turned on, and it contains an Antenna Unit other than “None”, the Y Axis Unit of the analyzer is forced to that Antenna Unit.

  • Page 186: Antenna Unit

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Antenna Unit For devices (like antennas) that make measurements of field strength or flux density, the correction array should contain within its values the appropriate conversion factors such that, when the data on the analyzer is presented in dBµV, the display is calibrated in the appropriate units. The "Antenna Unit" used for the conversion is contained within the corrections array database.
  • Page 187 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit Example :CORR:CSET:ANT UVM Readback "dBµV/m" Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBµA/m Sets the antenna unit to dBµA/m. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit will then be forced to dBµA/m and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out.

  • Page 188: Frequency Interpolation

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit Example :CORR:CSET:ANT UA Readback " dBµA" Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 Frequency Interpolation This setting controls how the correction values per-bucket are calculated. We interpolate between frequencies in either the logarithmic or linear scale. This setting is handled and stored individually per correction set.
  • Page 189 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output On a linear scale (like that of the spectrum analyzer), this translates to: If we interpolate on a linear scale, we assume that the two points are connected by a straight line on the linear scale, as below: EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 190: Description

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output The correction to be used for each bucket is taken from the interpolated correction curve at the center of the bucket. Description Sets an ASCII description field which will be stored in an exported file.  Can be displayed in the active function area by selecting as the active function, if desired to appear in a screen capture.

  • Page 191: Navigate

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output correction for all amplitude corrections which are currently on, although the total, accumulated correction for all corrections which are turned on is still applied to the data traces. Because corrections data is always in dB, but the Y-axis of the analyzer is in absolute units, it is necessary to establish a reference line for display of the Corrections data.

  • Page 192: Frequency

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Frequency Lets you edit the frequency of the current row. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Edit Notes There is no value readback on the key. 1 THz Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Amplitude Lets you edit the Amplitude of the current row. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections, Edit Notes...

  • Page 193: Apply Corrections

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output deletion is only performed if you press OK or Enter. Key Path Input/Output, Corrections Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...|6:DELete Example CORR:CSET:DEL CORR:CSET1:DEL CORR:CSET4:DEL Notes Pressing this key when no corrections are present is accepted without error. Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Apply Corrections Applies amplitude corrections, which are marked as ON to the measured data.

  • Page 194: Remote Correction Data Set Commands

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Remote Correction Data Set Commands This section describes the remote (SCPI) commands used to put values into correction sets. See the correction / table editor section of the Input/Output section for the information on front panel entry of correction data.
  • Page 195 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Preset Empty after Restore Input/Output Defaults.  Survives shutdown/restart of analyzer application (including power cycle) Freq:  0 Hz Amptd:  –1000 dBm Freq:  1 THz Amptd:  +1000 dBm Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.14.00  Freq Ref In Specifies the frequency reference as being the internal reference at the rear panel input labeled EXT REF IN, a 1 pulse per second signal at the EXT REF IN input,, external reference or sensing the presence of a signal at the EXT REF IN input.
  • Page 196 Status Bits/OPC STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency bit 1 set if unlocked. dependencies Backwards Compatibility Freq Ref In was not saved in state in the legacy instruments. It is a part of state in the X-Series. Notes Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.14.00...

  • Page 197: Sense

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Sense If Sense is selected, the instrument checks whether a signal is present at the external reference connector.  If it senses a signal within 5 ppm of the External Ref Freq (as set on the External Ref Freq softkey), it will use this signal as an External Reference. ...
  • Page 198 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output to Sense and there is a valid external reference present) this information is used by the analyzer to determine the internal settings needed to lock to that particular external reference signal.  For the instrument to stay locked, the value entered must be within 5 ppm of the actual external reference frequency.

  • Page 199: External Reference Lock Bw

    Notes Gate Output. In the X-Series each of these physical connectors requires configuration, thus the user interface has been added for X-Series, along with the potential for an output you think is always on to be switched off. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00...

  • Page 200: Trig Out

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Trig Out Select the type of output signal that will be output from the Trig 1 Out, or Trig 2 Out connectors. Key Path Input/Output, Output Config Remote Command :TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut HSWP | MEASuring | MAIN | GATE | GTRigger | OEVen | SPOint | SSWeep | SSETtled | S1Marker | S2Marker | S3Marker | S4Marker | OFF :TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut?

  • Page 201: Sweeping (Hswp)

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP OFF Readback Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Sweeping (HSWP) Selects the Sweeping Trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out, or Trig 2 Out, connector when a measurement is made.

  • Page 202: Gate

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output Example TRIG1:OUTP GTR Readback Gate Trigger Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Gate Selects the gate signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out, or Trig 2 Out, connector. The gate signal has been delayed and its length determined by delay and length settings.

  • Page 203: Analog Out

    Notes with Tune and Listen, in which case it was DAUDio, and there was no selection menu.  So for backwards compatibility with earlier X-Series firmware versions, Auto (:OUTP:ANAL:AUTO ON) will duplicate the prior behavior. The DNWB and SANalyzer parameters, which were legal in PSA but perform no function in the X- Series, are accepted without error.

  • Page 204: Screen Video

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output If you make a selection manually from the Analog Out menu, this selection will remain in force until you change it (or re-select Auto), even if you go to a mode or measurement for which the selected output does not apply.

  • Page 205: Demod Audio

    Furthermore, the PSA Option 124 hardware was unipolar and its large range was padded to be exactly right for use as a Screen Video output.  In the X-Series, the hardware is bipolar and has a wider range to accommodate the other output choices.  Therefore, the outputs won’t match up exactly and users may have to modify their setup when applying the X-Series in a PSA application.

  • Page 206: Digital Bus

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output • CISPR detectors (QPD, EMI Avg, RMS Avg) are unavailable Readback Text Demod Audio Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 (this was the default functionality, and there was no selection) Modified at S/W Revision A.04.00 Digital Bus This menu allows you to configure the LVDS connector located on the rear panel of the instrument.
  • Page 207 Notes IF Out menu.  In the X-Series, it is necessary to switch the Aux IF Out to “Second IF” to get this functionality, whereas in PSA it is always on, since there are no other choices.  Hence a command to switch this function to “Second IF”...

  • Page 208: Second If

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out Example OUTP:AUX OFF causes the aux output type to be off Readback Text Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Second IF In this mode the 2nd IF output is routed to the rear panel connector. The annotation on the key shows the current 2nd IF frequency in use in the analyzer.

  • Page 209: Next

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output ports. This is the first step in both the I/Q Cable Calibration and the I/Q Probe Calibration. Next Perform the I/Q Isolation calibration. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Calibration Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:ISOLation Example CAL:IQ:ISOL Notes All front panel I/Q ports must not be connected to anything.
  • Page 210 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output The guided calibration (front panel only) will show connection diagrams and guide you through the isolation calibration and calibrating each port. The calibration data for each port is stored separately, so as soon as a port is calibrated that data is saved and will be used. If you press "Exit" to exit the calibration process, the data for the ports already completed will still be used.

  • Page 211: I-Bar Port

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Example CAL:IQ:FLAT:I Notes The recommended procedure is to use the same BNC cable to calibrate all I/Q ports. All I/Q ports should be calibrated sequentially during the procedure. The calibration data is saved as soon as the port is calibrated and will survive power cycles. It is not reset by any preset or restore data commands.
  • Page 212 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:IBAR Example CAL:IQ:FLAT:IBAR Notes The recommended procedure is to use the same BNC cable to calibrate all I/Q ports. All I/Q ports should be calibrated sequentially during the procedure. The calibration data is saved as soon as the port is calibrated and will survive power cycles. It is not reset by any preset or restore data commands.

  • Page 213: Q-Bar Port

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Calibrate… Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:Q Example CAL:IQ:FLAT:Q Notes The recommended procedure is to use the same BNC cable to calibrate all I/Q ports. All I/Q ports should be calibrated sequentially during the procedure. The calibration data is saved as soon as the port is calibrated and will survive power cycles.

  • Page 214: I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Calibrate… Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:QBAR Example CAL:IQ:FLAT:QBAR Notes The recommended procedure is to use the same BNC cable to calibrate all I/Q ports. All I/Q ports should be calibrated sequentially during the procedure. The calibration data is saved as soon as the port is calibrated and will survive power cycles.
  • Page 215 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output The guided calibration (front panel only) will show connection diagrams and guide the user through the I/Q Isolation Calibration and through calibrating each port. The calibration data for each port is stored separately, so as soon as a port is calibrated that data is saved and will be used. If a user presses "Exit" to exit the calibration process, the data for the port already completed will still be used.

  • Page 216: I-Bar Port

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup, Q Probe, Calibrate Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Next Perform the I port calibration. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup, I Probe, Calibrate Remote Command :CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I Example CAL:IQ:PROB:I Notes The I port must be connected to the Cal Out port before issuing the SCPI command.
  • Page 217 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output attached. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Back Return to the prior step in the calibration procedure. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup, I Probe, Calibrate Notes Using the Back button will not restore the calibration data to a prior state. Once a port is calibrated the data is stored immediately and the only way to change it is to redo the calibration step.
  • Page 218 4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Q Port The Q port calibration is performed with the probe body attached to the front panel's Q port and the probe tip connected via an adapter to the Cal Out port. The guided calibration will show a diagram of the required connections.

  • Page 219: Q-Bar Port

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output to redo the calibration step. When the calibration may be left in an inconsistent state, a confirmation dialog will be displayed (see "Exit Confirmation" on page 220 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Q-bar Port The Q-bar port calibration is performed with the probe body attached to the front panel's Q-bar port and the probe tip connected via an adapter to the Cal Out port.

  • Page 220: Show Adapter Screen

    4  Input/Output Functions Input/Output Exit Exit the calibration procedure. All ports calibrated before pressing Exit will use the newly acquired calibration data. Key Path Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup, Q Probe, Calibrate Notes Using the Exit button will not restore the calibration data to the state prior to entering the guided calibration.

  • Page 221: Mode Functions

    Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer EMI Receiver Mode Reference 5 Mode Functions...

  • Page 222: Mode

    5  Mode Functions Mode Mode The Mode key allows you to select the available measurement applications or “Modes”. Modes are a collection of measurement capabilities packaged together to provide an instrument personality that is specific to your measurement needs. Each application software product is ordered separately by Model Number and must be licensed ...

  • Page 223: More Information

    SCPI), there will be a pause while the Application is loaded.  During this pause a message box that says “Loading application, please wait…” is displayed. Each application (Mode) that runs in the X-Series signal analyzers consumes virtual memory.  The various applications consume varying amounts of virtual memory, and as more applications run, the memory consumption increases.

  • Page 224: Spectrum Analyzer

    5  Mode Functions Mode memory is being used by all loaded applications – which includes those that preloaded at startup, and all of those that have been run since startup.  When you request a Mode that is not currently loaded, the instrument looks up the memory estimate for that Mode, and adds it to the residual total for all currently loaded Modes. ...

  • Page 225: Emi Receiver

    5  Mode Functions Mode EMI Receiver The EMI Receiver Mode makes EMC measurements. Several measurements are provided to aid the user in characterizing EMC performance of their systems, including looking at signals with CISPR–16 compliant detectors, performing scans for interfering signals, and determining and charting interfering signals over time.

  • Page 226: Noise Figure

    5  Mode Functions Mode Noise Figure The Noise Figure mode provides pre-configured measurements for making general purpose measurements of device noise figure. If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the mode, and re-access Help.

  • Page 227: Application Mode Number Selection (Remote Command Only)

    For more information see the Agilent 89600 Series VSA web site at www.agilent.com/find/89600vsa To learn more about how to use the 89600 VSA running in the X-Series, after the 89600 VSA software is running, open the 89600 VSA Help and open the "About Agilent X-Series Signal Analyzer with 89600 VSA Software"...
  • Page 228 5  Mode Functions Mode The Mode Number is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument:NSELect command.  The Mode Parameter is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument[:SELect] command. Mode Parameter Mode Mode Number Spectrum Analyzer Real Time Spectrum Analyzer RTSA Sequence Analyzer SEQAN EMI Receiver...

  • Page 229: Application Mode Catalog Query (Remote Command Only)

    VSA (E4406A) :INSTrument:CATalog? returned a list of installed INSTrument:SELECT items as a comma separated Compatibil list of string values: ity Notes "BASIC","GSM","EDGEGSM","CDMA","NADC","PDC","WCDMA","CDMA2K","CDMA1XEV","IDEN","WIDEN","WL AN","SERVICE" X-Series uses the ESA/PSA compatible query of a string contain comma separated values: "SA,PNOISE,NFIGURE,BASIC,CDMA,CDMA2K,WCDMA,CDMA1XEV,EDGEGSM,GSM,NADC,PDC,TDSCDMA,DMOD ULATION,WLAN" Initial S/W Prior to A.02.00 Revision Application Identification (Remote Commands Only) Each entry in the Mode Menu will have a Model Number and associated information: Version, and Options.

  • Page 230: Current Application Model

    5  Mode Functions Mode "Current Application Options" on page 230 Current Application Model Returns a string that is the Model Number of the currently selected application (mode). Remote Command :SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent][:NAME]? Example :SYST:APPL? Notes Query returns a quoted string that is the Model Number of the currently selected application (Mode). Example: "N9060A"...

  • Page 231: Application Identification Catalog (Remote Commands Only)

    5  Mode Functions Mode Preset Not affected by a Preset State Saved Not saved in state per se, the value will be the selected application when a Save is invoked. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Application Identification Catalog (Remote Commands Only) A catalog of the installed and licensed applications (Modes) can be queried for their identification.

  • Page 232: Application Catalog Options

    Prior to A.02.00 Detailed List of Modes This section contains an alphabetical list of Modes available in the X-Series, along with a brief description of each Mode. Note that with the exception of the 89601 VSA, only licensed applications appear in the Mode menu.  The 89601 will always appear, because it’s licensing is handled differently.

  • Page 233: Ofdma (Wimax/Wibro)

    5  Mode Functions Mode Example INST:SEL CDMA1XEV INST:NSEL 15 Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro) Selects the OFDMA mode for general purpose measurements of WiMAX signals. There are several measurements available in this mode. If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the mode, and re-access Help.

  • Page 234: Analog Demod

    For more information see the Agilent 89600 Series VSA web site at www.agilent.com/find/89600vsa To learn more about how to use the 89600 VSA running in the X-Series, after the 89600 VSA software is running, open the 89600 VSA Help and open the "About Agilent X-Series Signal Analyzer with 89600 VSA Software"...

  • Page 235: Cdma2000

    5  Mode Functions Mode If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the mode, and re-access Help. Key Path Mode Example INST:SEL BT...

  • Page 236: Combined Fixed Wimax

    5  Mode Functions Mode INST:NSEL 19 Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Combined Fixed WiMAX Selects the Combined Fixed WiMAX mode for general purpose measurements of signals following this standard. There are several measurements available in this mode. If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the mode, and re-access Help.

  • Page 237: Dvb-T/H With T2

    5  Mode Functions Mode DVB-T/H with T2 Selects the DVB-T/H mode for measurements of digital video signals using this format. There are several power and demod measurements available in this mode. If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the mode, and re-access Help.

  • Page 238: Iden/Widen/Mototalk

    5  Mode Functions Mode iDEN/WiDEN/MOTOTalk Selects the iDEN/WiDEN/MOTOTalk mode for general purpose measurements of iDEN and iDEN-related signals. There are several measurements available in this mode.  If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the mode, and re-access Help.

  • Page 239: Lte-Advanced Fdd

    5  Mode Functions Mode If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the mode, and re-access Help. Key Path Mode Example INST:SEL LTE...

  • Page 240: Lte-Advanced Tdd

    5  Mode Functions Mode LTE-Advanced TDD As LTE-Advanced TDD  and LTE TDD modes are converged into one single application, the single softkey under Mode menu is designed  to select the coverged mode.  The display mode of the LTE TDD and LTE- Advanced TDD are distinguished by the licenses.

  • Page 241: Phase Noise

    5  Mode Functions Mode Phase Noise The Phase Noise mode provides pre-configured measurements for making general purpose measurements of device phase noise. If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information. If it is not active, exit the Help feature (Esc key), select the mode, and re-access Help.

  • Page 242: Scpi Language Compatibility

    5  Mode Functions Mode SCPI Language Compatibility The SCPI Language Compatibility mode provides remote language compatibility for SCPI-based instruments, such as the Rohde and Schwartz FSP and related series of spectrum analyzers. After changing into or out of this mode, allow a 1 second delay before sending any subsequent commands. If you are using the Help feature, this mode must be currently active to access its detailed information.

  • Page 243: Vector Signal Analyzer (Vxa)

    EVM traces and up to four simultaneous displays. Analog baseband analysis is available using the MXA and PXA with option BBA. Option 3FP WLAN has been discontinued. N9064A honors existing 89601X licenses with all features and functionalities found on X-Series software versions prior to A.06.00. Specifically: N9064A–1 is equivalent to 89601X–205...

  • Page 244: Global Settings

    5  Mode Functions Mode Example INST:SEL WLAN INST:NSEL 217 Initial S/W Revision A.09.491 Global Settings Opens a menu that allows you to switch certain Meas Global parameters to a Mode Global state. These switches apply to all Modes that support global settings.  No matter what Mode you are in when you set the “Global Center Frequency”...

  • Page 245: Restore Defaults

    5  Mode Functions Mode Remote Command :GLOBal:FREQuency:CENTer[:STATe] 1|0|ON|OFF :GLOBal:FREQuency:CENTer[:STATe]? Preset Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Restore Defaults This key resets all of the functions in the Global Settings menu to Off. This also occurs when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed. Key Path Mode Setup, Global Settings Remote Command...

  • Page 246: Mode Setup

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Mode Setup The Mode Setup menu contains setup functions that are global across the entire Mode. These functions are independent of which measurement is currently running - they are global to all measurements in the mode, or "Meas Global." ...

  • Page 247: Preset To

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup to –3 dB. Choosing a CISPR detector or CISPR presets automatically picks the CISPR Standard, however switching from a CISPR detector has no impact on EMC Standard. When EMC Standard set to CISPR, the default detector for meter 1 is Peak, meter 2 is Quasi Peak and EMI Average is the default detector for meter 3.

  • Page 248: Meters Control

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup R&S ESU 503, 507, 508, 513 ESU–8 ESU–26 ESU–40 R&S ESL ESL–3 507, 508, 513, 526, 550 ESL–6 Key Path Mode Setup Notes Front panel only. Preset System IDN Response, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults. State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 249: Meter

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Meter Sets the state of the selected Meter. If the meter is turned on, the selected meter will be shown in the display and the measurement will be performed using the corresponded detector type. If it is off, it will be excluded from the display. ...
  • Page 250 5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Couplings Selecting a detector for a meter (pressing the key or sending a [:SENS]:MET:DET command) puts the meter in On, even if that detector was already selected. Voltage averaging will be used. Preset POSitive|QPEak|EAVerage State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Peak|Quasi Peak|EMI Average|RMS Average|Negative Peak...

  • Page 251: Limit

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Limit Enables you to set a limit value for meters. Key Path Mode Setup, Meters Control, Meters Remote Command :CALCulate:METer[1]|2|3:LIMit[:DATA] <ampl> :CALCulate:METer[1]|2|3:LIMit[:DATA]? :CALCulate:METer[1]|2|3:LIMit:STATe ON|OFF|1|0 :CALCulate:METer[1]|2|3:LIMit:STATe? Example CALC:MET2:LIM 4dBuV  Set the limit line of Meter 2 to 4 dBuV. :CALC:MET:LIM:STAT OFF ! Turns off the limit for Meter 1.

  • Page 252: Current Power (Remote Query Only)

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Key Path Remote command only Remote Command :CALCulate:METer:LIMit:ALL:FAIL? Example CALC:MET:LIM:ALL:FAIL? Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Current Power (Remote Query Only) Queries the current power of meters in the currently selected amplitude unit. Returns the minimum data value if the meter is off.

  • Page 253: Peak Hold Time

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup 100 s Default Unit Backwards :SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:SWEep:TIME Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix 1|2 is irrelevant to the SCPI Notes measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Peak Hold Time...

  • Page 254: Infinite

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state 0.5 s 1000 s Default Unit Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Infinite Sets the Peak Hold Time to Infinite. Key Path Mode Setup, Meters Control, Peak Hold Time Example MET:PHOL:TYPE INF Readback Text Infinite...

  • Page 255: Auto Preamp

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Key Path Mode Setup, Meters Control, Autorange Remote Command [:SENSe]:METer:ATTenuation:AUTO ON|OFF|1|0 [:SENSe]:METer:ATTenuation:AUTO? Example :MET:ATT:AUTO 0 :MET:ATT:AUTO? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation:AUTO Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 are irrelevant to the SCPI Notes measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility.

  • Page 256: Couple Meters To Marker

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup SENS:FSC:SLIS:COUP:MET? Couplings Couple Meters to Marker key will be turned off when this key is turned on. Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range On|Off Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Couple Meters to Marker If this is turned on, the measurement will automatically couple Meters frequency to frequency of the selected marker.

  • Page 257: Noise Reduction

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:FSCan:FINal:ATTenuation:PROTection Backwards Compatibility This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the SCPI Notes measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Initial S/W Revision A.10.00 Noise Reduction Noise Reduction accesses a menu for configuring the noise compensation of the instrument. ...

  • Page 258: More Information

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Couplings When NFE is enabled in any mode manually, a prompt will be displayed reminding you to perform the Characterize Noise Floor operation if it is needed.  If NFE is enabled through SCPI and a Characterize Noise Floor operation is needed, an error will be entered in the system error queue.

  • Page 259: Global Settings

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup is designed to report the amount of input signal that is in excess of the thermal noise, not the amount that includes the thermal noise. This can be a useful behavior because thermal noise often interferes with what you want to measure, instead of being part of what you want to measure.

  • Page 260: Restore Defaults

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup This function is reset to Off when the Restore Defaults key is pressed in the Global Settings menu, or when System, Restore Defaults, All Modes is pressed. Key Path Mode Setup, Global Settings Scope Mode Global Remote Command :INSTrument:COUPle:EMC:STANdard ALL|NONE :INSTrument:COUPle:EMC:STANdard?

  • Page 261: Phase

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Remote control deactivated This query will return :- FOUR when ESH2-Z5 is selected. Preset Set to off on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision A.13.50 Phase This command enables you to select the phase of the V-network that is used, which is controlled via the AUX IO port.

  • Page 262: V-Network

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Range GRO|FLO Initial S/W Revision A.13.50 V-network Enables you to select the V-network that is controlled via the AUX IO port. Key Path Mode Setup, LISN Control Remote Command INPut[1]|2:LISN[:TYPE] FOURphase|ESH2Z5| ENV216 | OFF INPut[1]|2:LISN[:TYPE]? Example...

  • Page 263: Khz Highpass

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Only one phase can be selected. Initial S/W Revision A.13.50 150 kHz Highpass Controls highpass setting on the V-network. Key Path Mode Setup, LISN Control, ENV216 Remote Command INPut[1]|2:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 INPut[1]|2:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe]? Example :INP:LISN:FILT:HPAS ON Dependencies This key is grayed out when V-network other than ENV216 is selected.

  • Page 264: Restore Mode Defaults

    5  Mode Functions Mode Setup Restore Mode Defaults Resets the state for the currently active mode by resetting the mode persistent settings to their factory default values, clearing mode data and by performing a Mode Preset. Restore Mode Defaults for more information. Key Path Mode Setup Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 265: System Functions

    Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer EMI Receiver Mode Reference 6 System Functions...

  • Page 266: File

    6  System Functions File File Opens a menu that enables you to access various standard and custom Windows functions. Press any other front-panel key to exit Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 File Explorer Opens the standard Windows File Explorer. The File Explorer opensin the My Documents directory for the current user.

  • Page 267: Print

    6  System Functions File Key Path File Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Print The Print key opens a Print dialog for configured printing (for example, to the printer of your choice).  Refer to your Microsoft Windows Operating System manual for more information. Maximize/Restore Down These keys allow the Instrument Application to be maximized and then restored to its prior state.

  • Page 268: Print

    6  System Functions File Key Path File Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Paper size, the printer paper source, the page orientation and the margins are all settable. Just like any standard Windows dialog, you may navigate the dialog using the front-panel keys, or a mouse. There are no SCPI commands for controlling these parameters.

  • Page 269: Restore Down

    6  System Functions File The :HCOPy command is equivalent to pressing the PRINT key.  The HCOPy:ABORt command can be used to abort a print which is already in progress.  Sending HCOPy:ABORt will cause the analyzer to stop sending data to the printer, although the printer may continue or even complete the print, depending on how much data was sent to the printer before the user sent the ABORt command.

  • Page 270: Exit

    6  System Functions File Exit This key, when pressed, will exit the Instrument Application. A dialog box is used to confirm that you intended to exit the application: Key Path File Mode Notes The Instrument Application willclose. No further SCPI commands can be sent. Use with caution! Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 271: Print

    6  System Functions Print Print This front-panel key is equivalent to performing a File, Print, OK. It immediately performs the currently configured Print to the Default printer. The :HCOPy command is equivalent to pressing the PRINT key.  The HCOPy:ABORt command can be used to abort a print which is already in progress. ...

  • Page 272: System

    6  System Functions System System Opens a menu of keys that access various configuration menus and dialogs. Key Path Front-panel key Notes No remote command for this key specifically. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Show Accesses a menu of choices that enable you to select the information window you want to view. Key Path System Mode...

  • Page 273: Previous

    In some legacy analyzers, the Repeat field shows the number of times the message has repeated Notes since the last time the error queue was cleared. In the X-Series, the Repeat field shows the number of times the error has repeated since the last intervening error. So the count may very well be...

  • Page 274: Next

    6  System Functions System Next Page Next Page and Previous Page menu keys move you between pages of the log, if it fills more than one page. These keys are grayed out in some cases: • If on the last page of the log, the Next Page key is grayed-out •...

  • Page 275: Refresh

    6  System Functions System Key Path System, Show, Errors Mode Remote Command :SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose OFF|ON|0|1 :SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose? Example :SYST:ERR:VERB ON Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to OFF on a “Restore System Defaults->Misc” State Saved Range On | Off Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Refresh...

  • Page 276: System

    6  System Functions System not put into the SCPI error queue by default. Normally the status bit is the only way for detecting these errors remotely. It is possible to enable Input Overload reporting to the SCPI queue, by issuing the :SYSTem:ERRor:OVERload ON command.

  • Page 277: Show System Contents (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System Mode Example SYST:SHOW SYST Backwards Compatibility The hardware statistics that are displayed in the PSA Show System screen have been moved to a Notes dedicated Show Hardware Statistics screen in the Service Menu. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Show System contents (Remote Command Only) A remote command is available to obtain the contents of the Show System screen (the entire contents, not...

  • Page 278: System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only)

    6  System Functions System The Previous Page is grayed-out if the first page of information is presently displayed. The Next Page menu key is grayed-out if the last page is information is presently displayed. Key Path System, Show Mode Example SYST:SHOW HARD Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00...

  • Page 279: System Powerdown (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System "List installed Options (Remote Command Only)" on page 354 "Lock the Front-panel keys (Remote Command Only)" on page 354 "List SCPI Commands (Remote Command Only)" on page 354 "SCPI Version Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 355 "Date (Remote Command Only)"...

  • Page 280: List Scpi Commands (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System The front panel ‘Local’ key (Cancel/Esc) has no effect if Klock is ON. Mode Remote Command :SYSTem:KLOCk OFF|ON|0|1 :SYSTem:KLOCk? Example :SYST:KLOC ON Notes Keyboard lock remains in effect until turned-off or the instrument is power-cycled Preset Initialized to OFF at startup, unaffected by Preset State Saved Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 281: Time (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System Example :SYST:DATE “2006,05,26” Notes <year> is the four digit representation of year. (for example, 2006) <month> is the two digit representation of year. (for example. 01 to 12) <day> is the two digit representation of day. (for example, 01 to 28, 29, 30, or 31) depending on the month and year Unless the current account has Power User or Administrator privileges, an error will be generated by this command and no action will be taken.

  • Page 282: Mode And Input/Output Defaults

    6  System Functions System Notes replaced by this 1-of-N key in the System menu. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Mode and Input/Output Defaults When the analyzer is powered on in Mode and Input/Output Defaults, it performs a Restore Mode Defaults to all modes in the instrument and also performs a Restore Input/Output Defaults.

  • Page 283: Power On Application

    6  System Functions System An instrument can never power up for the first time in Last. If line power to the analyzer is interrupted, for example by pulling the line cord plug or by switching off power to a test rack, Power On Last State may not work properly. For proper operation, Power On Last State depends on you shutting down the instrument using the Standby key or the SYSTem:PDOWn SCPI command.

  • Page 284: Configure Applications

    Note that there are more applications available for the X-Series than can fit into Windows Virtual Memory. By allowing you to choose which licensed applications to load at startup, the Configure Applications utility allows you to make optimal use of your memory.

  • Page 285: Access To Configure Applications Utility

    Virtual memory usage There are more applications available for the X-Series than can fit into memory at any one time, so the Configure Applications utility includes a memory tracker that serves two purposes: 1.

  • Page 286: Deselect All

    6  System Functions System Deselect All Clears the marks from all applications in the selection list, except the Power On application. The Power On application cannot be eliminated from the pre-load list. Key Path System, Power On, Configure Applications Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Move Up The application list is the order that applications appear in the Mode Menu.

  • Page 287: Exit Without Saving

    6  System Functions System Key Path System, Power On, Configure Applications Remote Command :SYSTem:PUP:PROCess Example :SYST:PUP:PROC   This is the SCPI command for restarting the analyzer.  You must Wait after this command for the instrument application to restart Notes The softkey will be grayed-out when the virtual memory of the selected applications exceeds 100% of the limit.

  • Page 288: Configure Applications - Instrument Boot-Up

    6  System Functions System If you press any key other than OK or Enter, it is construed as a Cancel, because the only path that will actually cause the reset to be executed is through OK or Enter. Key Path System, Power On Example :SYST:DEF PON...

  • Page 289: Configuration List (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System Configuration list (Remote Command Only) This remote command is used to set or query the list of applications to be loaded in-memory. Remote Command :SYSTem:PON:APPLication:LLISt <string of INSTrument:SELect names> :SYSTem:PON:APPLication:LLISt? Example :SYST:PON:APPL:LLIS "SA,BASIC,WCDMA" Notes <string of INSTrument:SELect names> are from the enums of the :INSTrument:SELect command. The order of the <INSTrument:SELect names>...

  • Page 290: Configuration Application Memory (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System Configuration Application Memory (Remote Command Only) This remote command is used to query the amount of Virtual Memory a particular application consumes. Remote Command :SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory:USED:NAME? <INSTrument:SELect name> Example :SYST:PON:APPL:VMEM:USED:NAME? CDMA2K Notes <INSTrument:SELect name> is from the enums of the :INSTrument:SELect command Value returned will be 0 (zero) if the name provided is invalid.

  • Page 291: Normal

    Enumeration (string). Thus, queries by customer applications into numeric variables will result in an error 3. In PSA Auto Align OFF was not completely off, it is equivalent to PARTial in X-Series. In X-Series, OFF will be fully OFF. This means users of PSA SCPI who choose OFF may see degraded performance and should migrate their software to use PARTial.

  • Page 292: Partial

    6  System Functions System Calibration bit 11 are cleared. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Partial Auto Align, Partial disables the full automatic alignment and the maintenance of warranted operation for the benefit of improved measurement throughput. Accuracy is retained for the Resolution Bandwidth filters and the IF Passband, which is critical to FFT accuracy, demodulation, and many measurement applications.

  • Page 293: Alert

    6  System Functions System When Auto Align, Off is selected the Settings Panel indicates ALIGN OFF with a warning icon. The warning icon is to inform the operator that they are responsible for maintaining the warranted operation of the instrument: Key Path System, Alignments, Auto Align Mode...
  • Page 294 6  System Functions System With Auto Align set to Normal, the configuration of Alert is not relevant because the instrument’s software maintains the instrument in warranted operation. Key Path System, Alignments, Auto Align Mode Remote Command :CALibration:AUTO:ALERt TTEMperature|DAY|WEEK|NONE :CALibration:AUTO:ALERt? Example :CAL:AUTO:ALER TTEM Notes The alert that alignment is needed is the setting of bit 14 in the Status Questionable Calibration...
  • Page 295 6  System Functions System No confirmation is required when Alert is configured through a remote command. Key Path System, Alignments, Auto Align, Alert Mode Example :CAL:AUTO:ALER DAY Readback Text 24 hours Status Bits/OPC Bit 14 is set in the Status Questionable Calibration register. dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00...

  • Page 296: Execute Expired Alignments (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System Key Path System, Alignments, Auto Align, Alert Mode Example :CAL:AUTO:ALER WEEK Readback Text 7 days Status Bits/OPC Bit 14 is set in the Status Questionable Calibration register. dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 None With Auto Align Alert set to None the instrument will not signal an alert. This is provided for rare occasions where you are making a long measurement which cannot tolerate Auto Align interruptions, and must have the ability to capture a screen image at the end of the measurement without an alert posted to the display.

  • Page 297: Align Now

    6  System Functions System Mode Remote Command :CALibration:EXPired? Example :CAL:EXP? Notes :CALibration:EXPired? returns 0 if successful :CALibration:EXPired? returns 1 if failed Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Align Now Accesses alignment processes that are immediate action operations. They perform complete operations and run until they are complete.
  • Page 298 6  System Functions System GHz interference” are cleared, the Error Condition “Align Now, RF required” is cleared, and bits 11 and 12 are cleared in the Status Questionable Calibration register Align Now, All can be interrupted by pressing the Cancel (ESC) front-panel key or remotely with Device Clear followed by the :ABORt SCPI command.
  • Page 299 6  System Functions System *CAL? returns 1 if failed :CALibration[:ALL]? is the same as *CAL? See additional remarks described with :CALibration[:ALL]? Everything about :CALibration[:ALL]? is synonymous with *CAL? including all conditions, status register bits, and couplings Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 All but RF (In MXE the key label is “All but RF (not including RF Presel)”) Immediately executes an alignment of all subsystems except the RF subsystem .
  • Page 300 6  System Functions System This command is sequential; it must complete before further SCPI commands are processed. Interrupting the alignment from remote is accomplished by invoking Device Clear followed by the :ABORt command. Successful completion will clear bit 14 in the Status Questionable Calibration register and set bit 12 if invoked with “Align Now, All required”.

  • Page 301: All But Rf Preselector

    6  System Functions System :CALibration:RF? returns 1 if failed (including interfering user signal) While Align Now, RF is performing the alignment, bit 0 in the Status Operation register is set. Completion, or termination, will clear bit 0 in the Status Operation register. This command is sequential;...

  • Page 302: Rf Presel Only (20 Hz To 3.6 Ghz)

    6  System Functions System RF Presel Only (20 Hz to 3.6 GHz) This key only appears in the MXE and immediately executes an alignment of the RF Preselector section.  The receiver will stop any measurement currently underway, perform the alignment, and then restart the measurement from the beginning (similar to pressing the Restart key).

  • Page 303: Show Alignment Statistics

    6  System Functions System Couplings Initializes the time for the Last Align Conducted Now, Conducted Time. Initializes the time for the Last Align Radiated Now, Radiated Time. Records the temperature for the Last Align Conducted Now, Conducted Temperature. Records the temperature for the Last Align Radiated Now, Radiated Temperature. Status Bits/OPC Bit 8 or 9 may be set in the Status Questionable Calibration register.
  • Page 304 6  System Functions System Notes The values displayed on the screen are only updated upon entry to the screen and not updated while the screen is being displayed. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Key Path Visual annotation in the Show Alignment Statistics screen Mode Remote Command :SYSTem:PON:TIME?
  • Page 305 6  System Functions System Notes Value is in degrees Centigrade at which the last successful Align Now, All or Align Now, All but RF was executed. State Saved Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Key Path Visual annotation in the Show Alignment Statistics screen Mode Remote Command :CALibration:TIME:LRF?
  • Page 306 6  System Functions System Key Path Visual annotation in the Show Alignment Statistics screen Mode Remote Command :CALibration:TEMPerature:LPReselector? Example :CAL:TEMP:LPR? Notes Value is in degrees Centigrade at which the last successful Characterize Preselector was executed. Dependencies In models that do not include preselectors, this command is not enabled and any attempt to set or query will yield an error.
  • Page 307 6  System Functions System Key Path Visual annotation in the Show Alignment Statistics screen Mode Remote Command :CALibration:TIME:RFPSelector:LRADiated? Example :CAL:TIME:RFPS:LRAD? Notes Value is the date and time the last successful Align Now, 30 MHz – 3.6 GHz was executed. The date is separated from the time by a semi-colon character. ...

  • Page 308: Restore Align Defaults

    6  System Functions System Restore Align Defaults Initializes the alignment user interface settings, not alignment data, to the factory default values. Align Now, All must be executed if the value of the Timebase DAC results in a change. For front panel operation, you are prompted to confirm action before setting the alignment parameters to factory defaults: The parameters affected are: Parameter...

  • Page 309: Alignment Data Wizard

    6  System Functions System alignment that pertains to the instrument must be transferred to the resident hard drive after a CPU or hard drive is replaced.  This utility facilitates backing-up and restoring the alignment data. This utility allows the operator to navigate to any location of the Windows file system.  It is intended that the operator use a USB memory device or Mapped Network Drive to back up the alignment data to storage outside of the instrument.
  • Page 310 6  System Functions System The backup screen indicates the approximate amount of space required to contain the backup file. The default file name will be AlignDataBackup_<model number>_<serial number>_<date in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS>.bak. EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 311 6  System Functions System he default backup location will be first drive identified as an external drive (USB or LAN) if such is available; if not, the internal D: partition will be selected. Changing the drive letter will also modify the path displayed in the box below. When this step is first loaded, the drive drop-down menu is populated with connected drives, which provide the user with write access.
  • Page 312 6  System Functions System The restore operation checks the validity of the restore file using the database's built-in file validation. If the restore file is corrupt, the existing alignment data will remain in use. EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 313 6  System Functions System If the serial number information in the backup file being restored is different from that of the instrument, the following message appears (the serial number shown are examples): he default restore location will be first drive identified as an external drive (USB or LAN) if such is available; if not, the internal D: partition will be selected.

  • Page 314: Perform Backup (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System Perform Backup (Remote Command Only) Invokes an alignment data backup operation to the provided Folder. EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 315: Perform Restore (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System It is recommended that the Folder provided is outside of the instrument (USB or Mapped Network Drive). Remote Command :CALibration:DATA:BACKup <filename> Example :CAL:DATA:BACK "F:\AlignDataBackup_N9020A_US00000001_2008140100.bak" Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Perform Restore (Remote Command Only) Invokes an alignment data restore operation from the provided filename. Remote Command :CALibration:DATA:RESTore <filename>...

  • Page 316: Characterize Reference Clock

    6  System Functions System elapsed time counter for Last Characterize Preselector Time, and capture the Last Characterize Preselector Temperature. The last Characterize Preselector Time and Temperature survives across the power cycle as this operation is performed infrequently. The Characterize Preselector function can be interrupted by pressing the Cancel (ESC) front-panel key or remotely with Device Clear followed by the :ABORt SCPI command.
  • Page 317 6  System Functions System Remote Command :CALibration:REFerence:CLOCk? Example :CAL:REF:CLOC:INIT? //connect cable :CAL:REF:CLOC? //disconnect cable :CAL:REF:CLOC:END? Notes :CALibration:REFerence:CLOCk? returns 0 if successful :CALibration:REFerence:CLOCk? returns 1 if failed Dependencies Option DP2 or B40 Couplings Initializes the time for the Last Characterize Reference Clock Time. Records the temperature for the Last Characterize Reference Clock Temperature.
  • Page 318 6  System Functions System Parameter Name Last Characterize Reference Clock Key Path Visual annotation in the Show Alignment Statistics screen Parameter Type String Mode Remote Command :CALibration:TIME:REFerence:CLOCk? Example :CAL:TIME:REFerence:CLOCk? Notes Value is the date and time the last successful Characterize Reference Clock was executed. The date is separated from the time by a space character.

  • Page 319: Characterize Noise Floor

    6  System Functions System Step 3 of the guided calibration sequence: Characterize Noise Floor On instruments with the NF2 license installed, the calibrated Noise Floor used by Noise Floor Extensions should be refreshed periodically.  To do this, press the Characterize Noise Floor key. When you press this key, the instrument stops any measurement currently underway, and a dialog appears with an OK and Cancel button which says: ...
  • Page 320 6  System Functions System the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed when the analyzer is operating at an ambient temperature that is significantly different than the ambient temperature at which this alignment was last run.  In addition, Agilent recommends that the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed after the first 500 hours of operation, and once every calendar year. ...

  • Page 321: Tds Alignment

    6  System Functions System Dependencies In models that do not include NFE, this command is not enabled and any attempt to set or query will yield an error. State Saved Initial S/W Revision A.14.00 Key Path Visual annotation in the Show Alignment Statistics screen Mode Remote Command :CALibration:TEMPerature:NFLoor?

  • Page 322: Timebase Dac

    6  System Functions System Key Path System, Alignments, Advanced Mode Remote Command :CALibration:TDS Example :CAL:TDS Notes See SCPI for Align Piece Initial S/W Revision A.13.0 Timebase DAC Allows control of the internal 10 MHz reference oscillator timebase. This may be used to adjust for minor frequency alignment between the ...

  • Page 323: User

    16383 Backwards :CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse Compatibility SCPI ESA hardware contained two DAC controls for the Timebase. In X-Series the command :CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:FINE is the method for adjusting the timebase.  The :COARse command is provided as an alias to :FINE. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote Command :CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse <integer>...

  • Page 324: Rf Preselector

    6  System Functions System RF Preselector This menu and all of its submenus are only available in models with the RF Preselector, such as the N9038A. "Align Now, 20 Hz to 30 MHz" on page 324 "Align Now, 30 MHz to 3.6 GHz" on page 325 "Align Now, 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz"...
  • Page 325 6  System Functions System Example :CAL:RFPS:COND Notes For model N9038A only. :CALibration:RFPSelector:CONDucted? Return 0 if successful :CALibration:RFPSelector:CONDucted? Return 1 if failed When Align 20 Hz to 30 MHz is performing the alignment, bit 0 in the Status Operation register is set.
  • Page 326 6  System Functions System Mode Remote Command :CALibration:RFPSelector:RADiated :CALibration:RFPSelector:RADiated? Example :CAL:RFPS:RAD Notes For model N9038A only. :CALibration:RFPSelector:RADiated? Return 0 if successful :CALibration:RFPSelector:RADiated? Return 1 if failed When Align 30 MHz to 3.6 GHz is performing the alignment, bit 0 in the Status Operation register is set.

  • Page 327: Alert

    6  System Functions System The “Align 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz required” Error Condition will appear when this alignment has expired.  It is now your responsibility to perform the Align Now, 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz to keep the receiver in warranted operation.

  • Page 328: Schedule Setup

    6  System Functions System Example :CAL:RFPS:ALER OFF Notes For model N9038A only. Error Condition will be generated when the alert is On and any of the RF Preselector alignments has expired. Preset This is unaffected by Preset, but is set to ON on a “Restore System Defaults->Align”. State Saved Initial S/W Revision A.08.00...
  • Page 329 6  System Functions System Date/Time Enables you to configure the scheduler to run a task starting from this date and time. The date and time rely on the instrument’s local time to execute a scheduled task. The date is based on the format “YYYY/MM/DD”...
  • Page 330 6  System Functions System Time Enables you to configure the time of the scheduled task. The SCPI command to configure the date and time parameters of the scheduler is the same; however, they each have their own front panel-control. Key Path System, Alignments, RF Preselector, Schedule Setup, Date/Time Notes "Date/Time "...

  • Page 331: Scheduler

    6  System Functions System Mode Remote Command :CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:RECurrence:WEEK <integer> :CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:RECurrence:WEEK? Example :CAL:RFPS:SCH:REC:WEEK 2 Notes New scheduled date to run the alignment task will get updated when this parameter is changed.  For model N9038A only. Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to 1 on a “Restore System Defaults->Align”. State Saved Range 1–52...

  • Page 332: I/O Config

    6  System Functions System Example :CAL:RFPS:SCH:STAT OFF Notes For model N9038A only. Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to OFF on a “Restore System Defaults->Align”. State Saved Initial S/W Revision A.08.00 I/O Config Activates a menu for identifying and changing the I/O configuration for remote control. Key Path System Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 333: Gpib Controller

    6  System Functions System GPIB Controller Sets the GPIB port into controller or device mode. In the normal state, GPIB controller is disabled, which allows the analyzer to be controlled by a remote computer. When GPIB Controller is enabled, the instrument can run software applications that use the instrument's computer as a GPIB controller;...

  • Page 334: Scpi Lan

    6  System Functions System SCPI LAN Activates a menu for identifying and changing the SCPI over a LAN configuration. There are a number of different ways to send SCPI remote commands to the instrument over LAN. It can be a problem to have multiple users simultaneously accessing the instrument over the LAN.

  • Page 335: Sicl Server

    Turns the HiSLIP server capability On or Off, enabling you to limit SCPI access over LAN through the HiSLIP server. HiSLIP stands for High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol and is part of the IVI–6.1 specification. Here is an example of a VISA connection string used to connect to the HiSLIP Server on an X-Series Spectrum Analyzer: TCPIP0::a-n9030a–93016::hislip0::INSTR In the example above, hislip0 is the HiSLIP device name that VISA users must include in their HiSLIP VISA Address strings. ...

  • Page 336: Scpi Socket Control Port (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System Mode Remote Command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:HISLip:ENABle OFF|ON|0|1 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:HISLip:ENABle? Example :SYST:COMM:LAN:SCPI:HISL:ENAB OFF Preset This is unaffected by Preset, but is set to ON with a “Restore System Defaults->Misc” State Saved Range On | Off Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Command Only) Returns the TCP/IP port number of the control socket associated with the SCPI socket session.

  • Page 337: Lan Reset

    6  System Functions System If this control is entered without an external keyboard or mouse connected, you can cancel the control by pressing the Cancel (ESC) front-panel key. Key Path System, I/O Config Mode Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Opens a menu that allows you to access the various LXI configuration properties.

  • Page 338: System Idn Response

    6  System Functions System Example :LXI:IDEN ON Preset Not part of Preset, but reset to OFF on Restore System Defaults All State Saved Range On | Off Initial S/W Revision A.12.50 System IDN Response This key allows you to specify a response to the *IDN? query, or to return the analyzer to the Factory response if you have changed it.

  • Page 339: User

    6  System Functions System User This key allows you to specify your own response to the *IDN? query.  You may enter your desired response with the Alpha Editor or a plugin PC keyboard. When you press this key, the active function becomes the current User string with the cursor at the end.  This makes it easy to edit the existing string. ...

  • Page 340: Usb Packet Count (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System • The controller is currently powered off • The controller has explicitly placed the USB device into the suspended state. When in the suspended state, no USB activity, including start of frame packets are received. ACTive – Indicates that the USB device is in the active state. When the device is in the active state, it is receiving periodic start of frames but it isn’t necessarily receiving or transmitting data.

  • Page 341: Restore Input/Output Defaults

    6  System Functions System Restore Input/Output Defaults Causes the group of settings and data associated with Input/Output front-panel key to be a reset to their default values. This level of Restore System Defaults does not affect any other system settings, mode settings and does not cause a mode switch.

  • Page 342: Restore Align Defaults

    6  System Functions System Restore Align Defaults This selection causes the Alignment system settings to be a reset to their default values. This does not affect any Alignment data stored in the system. This level of Restore System Defaults does not affect any other system settings, mode settings and does not cause a mode switch.

  • Page 343: Restore Mode Defaults (All Modes)

    6  System Functions System Miscellaneous Setting Default Value SCPI Telnet SCPI Socket SICL Server Softkey Language English System Annotation Display Theme TDColor System IDN Response Factory result of *IDN? Display Intensity Display Backlight GPIB Address Confirmation is required to restore the factory default values. The confirmation dialog is: Key Path System, Restore System Defaults Example...
  • Page 344 6  System Functions System Key Path System, Restore System Defaults Example :SYST:DEF MOD Couplings An All Mode will cause the currently running measurement to be aborted, mode switch to the power- on mode and activate the default measurement for the power-on mode.. It gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings set.

  • Page 345: Control Panel

    6  System Functions System Control Panel… Opens the Windows Control Panel. The Control Panel is used to configure certain elements of Windows that are not configured through the hardkey/softkey System menus. This feature is not available if option SF1 is installed. The Control Panel is a separate Windows application, so to return to the analyzer once you are in the Control Panel, you may either: Exit the Control Panel by clicking on the red X in the upper right hand corner, with a mouse...

  • Page 346: Licensing

    Backwards Compatibility In ESA the SCPI command for displaying the Show Licenses screen is: Notes :SYSTem:CONFigure:LKEY:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:SYSTem:CONFigure:LKEY:STATe? There are no equivalent SCPI commands in the X-Series for displaying the License Explorer. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Remote :SYSTem:LKEY <”OptionInfo”>, <”LicenseInfo”>...
  • Page 347 6  System Functions System Remote Command :SYSTem:LKEY:LIST? Notes Return Value: An <arbitrary block data> of all the installed instrument licenses. The format of each license is as follows. <Feature>,<Version>,<Signature>,<Expiration Date>,<Serial Number for Transport> Return Value Example: #3136 N9073A–1FP,1.000,B043920A51CA N9060A–2FP,1.000,4D1D1164BE64 N9020A–508,1.000,389BC042F920 N9073A–1F1,1.000,5D71E9BA814C,13-aug–2005 <arbitrary block data>...

  • Page 348: Security

    6  System Functions System Security Accesses capabilities for operating the instrument in a security controlled environment. Key Path System Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 The Windows operating system can be configured to disable write access to the USB ports for users who are in a secure environment where transferring data from the instrument is prohibited. ...

  • Page 349: Diagnostics

    6  System Functions System Key Path System, Security, USB Example :SYST:SEC:USB:WPR ON          Will set USB ports to Read only Initial S/W Revision A.04.00 Diagnostics The Diagnostics key in the System menu gives you access to basic diagnostic capabilities of the instrument.

  • Page 350: Scpi For Show Hardware Statistics ( Remote Commands Only)

    6  System Functions System The CXA models in which the AC/DC Switch field is called Fixed Atten and that omit the mechanical attenuation fields are the N9000A–503/507 models. Modular HWs only have time and temperature information in Show Hardware Statistics. The data will be updated only when the Show Hardware Statistics menu key is pressed, it will not be updated while the screen is displayed.

  • Page 351: Query The Mechanical Relay Cycle Count

    6  System Functions System Query the Mechanical Relay Cycle Count Return the count of mechanical relay cycles.  For N9038A model, there are additional 2 Mechanical Relays which are <N9038A Input2>, <N9038A Bypass>. Remote Command :SYSTem:MRELay:COUNt? Example :SYST:MREL:COUN? Notes Query Only The return value is a comma separated list of the individual counts for each mechanical relay.

  • Page 352: Advanced

    6  System Functions System Remote Command :SYSTem:PON:ETIMe? Example :SYST:PON:ETIM? Notes Query Only Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Advanced Accesses advanced diagnostic capabilities performed in the factory or under instructions from repair procedures. This menu key is only visible when the logged-in user is “saservice”. This feature is not available if option SF1 is installed.

  • Page 353: Internet Explorer

    6  System Functions System SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DGATeway? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:GATEway? Subnet SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk <string> :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:SUBNetmask <string> Mask SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN[:SELF]:SUBNetmask? Internet Explorer… This key launches Microsoft Internet Explorer.  A mouse and external keyboard are highly desired for using Internet Explorer.  When Internet Explorer is running, close Internet Explorer to return focus to the Instrument Application (or use Alt-Tab).

  • Page 354: List Installed Options (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System List installed Options (Remote Command Only) Lists the installed options that pertain to the instrument (signal analyzer). . Mode Remote Command :SYSTem:OPTions? Example :SYST:OPT? Notes The return string is a comma separated list of the installed options. For example: “503,P03,PFR”...

  • Page 355: Scpi Version Query (Remote Command Only)

    6  System Functions System 0x0A) Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 SCPI Version Query (Remote Command Only) Returns the SCPI version number with which the instrument complies. The SCPI industry standard changes regularly. This command indicates the version used when the instrument SCPI commands were defined.
  • Page 356 6  System Functions System Notes <hour> is the two digit representation of the hour in 24 hour format <minute> is the two digit representation of minute <second> is the two digit representation of second Unless the current account has Power User or Administrator privileges, an error will be generated by this command and no action will be taken.

  • Page 357: Trigger Functions

    Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer EMI Receiver Mode Reference 7 Trigger Functions...

  • Page 358: Trigger

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger Trigger Accesses a menu of keys to control the selection of the trigger source and the setup of each of the trigger sources.  The analyzer is designed to allow triggering from a number of different sources, for example, Free Run, Video, External, RF Burst, and so forth.

  • Page 359: Trigger Source Presets

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger the EXTernal2 parameter will generate a “Hardware missing; Not available for this model number” message. Preset See table below Status Bits/OPC The Status Operation Register bit 5 "Waiting for Trigger" is set at the same time as the Sweeping or dependencies Measuring bit is set.
  • Page 360 7  Trigger Functions Trigger TD-SCDMA, source.  When the trigger source changes to 1xEVDO, LTE, RFBurst, External1 or External2, the gate state LTETDD, CMMB, is set to on, and the gate source is set ISDB-T, MSR identically with the trigger source. When the trigger source changes to IMMediate, VIDeo, LINE, FRAMe or IF, the gate state is set to off.
  • Page 361 7  Trigger Functions Trigger T/H, DTMB, LTE, LTETDD, CMMB, ISDB-T, Digital Cable TV, MSR WCDMA WCDMA PCON WCDMA QPSK WCDMA, C2K, All except 1xEVDO CDMA1xEVDO: IMMediate CDMA1xEVDO: EXT1 All except SA and IQ not BASIC supported LTETDD: LTETDD: BTS: External 1 BTS: External MS: Periodic Timer...

  • Page 362: Rf Trigger Source

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger EDGE EVM EDGE/GSM IQMag EDGE ORFS EDGE/GSM Periodic Timer IQ not supported Combined WCDMA IQ not supported WCDMA Combined EDGE/GSM IQ not supported List Power WCDMA, IQ not Step EDGE/GSM supported Transmit LTETDD LTETDD: LTETDD: On/Off BTS: External 1 BTS: External Power...

  • Page 363: I/Q Trigger Source

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger TRIG:RF:SOUR VID Selects video triggering for the SANalyzer measurement and the RF input.  For SAN, do not use the <measurement> keyword. Notes Not all measurements have all the trigger sources available to them. Check the trigger source documentation for your specific measurement to see what sources are available.

  • Page 364: More Information

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger −IMMediate - free run triggering −EXTernal1 (or EXTernal) - triggers on an externally connected trigger source on the rear panel −EXTernal2 - triggers on an externally connected trigger source on the front panel −IQMag - triggers on the magnitude of the I/Q signal −IDEMod - triggers on the I/Q signal's demodulated I voltage −QDEMod - triggers on the I/Q signal's demodulated Q voltage −IINPut - triggers on the I channel's ADC voltage...

  • Page 365: Free Run

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger The following examples show trigger setup parameters using an external trigger source. Example 1 illustrates the trigger conditions with negative slope and no trigger occurs during trigger Holdoff time. Example 2 illustrates the trigger conditions with positive slope, trigger delay, and auto trigger time. Free Run Pressing this key, when it is not selected, selects free-run triggering.

  • Page 366: Video (If Envelope)

    (such as Marker Noise or Band/Intvl Power) were not available when the video trigger was on. Similarly, Video triggering was not available when the detector was Average.  In the X-Series, these restrictions are removed. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00...

  • Page 367: Trig Slope

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger given yourself effective gain with an amplitude correction factor, the Video Trigger will not fire until you have dropped the trigger line that far below the displayed signal level, rather than simply dropping it down to the displayed signal level.  Note that other corrections, specifically External Gain and Ref Level Offset, modify the actual trace data as it is taken and therefore ARE taken into account by Trig Level.

  • Page 368: Trig Delay

    State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards Compatibility In ESA/PSA, the Trigger Slope was global to all triggers.  In the X-Series, the slope can be set Notes individually for each Trigger Source.  For backward compatibility, the global SLOPe command updates all instances of trigger slope (VID, LINE, EXT1, EXT2, TV, RFB). The query returns the trigger slope setting of the currently selected trigger source.

  • Page 369: External 1

    These are ESA commands for trigger offset that allowed you to use a positive or negative delay when in zero span and in a Res BW >= 1 kHz. For ESA compatibility, X-series analyzers keep track of this offset and adds it to the Trigger Delay for VIDeo, LINE, EXTernal1 or EXTernal2 whenever the value is sent to the hardware, if in Zero Span and RBW >= 1 kHz.

  • Page 370: Trigger Level

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger Dependencies Grayed out if in use by Point Trigger in the Source Setup menu.  Forced to Free Run if already selected and Point Trigger is set to External 1. State Saved Saved in instrument state Status Bits/OPC dependencies The Status Operation Register bit 5 "Waiting for Trigger"...

  • Page 371: Trig Delay

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal1:SLOPe? Example TRIG:EXT1:SLOP NEG Couplings This same slope is used in the Ext1 selection for the trigger source in the Trigger menu and for the period timer sync source (in the Trigger menu and in the Gate Source menu). Preset POSitive State Saved...

  • Page 372: Zero Span Delay Comp On/Off

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger Notes and RFB triggers. The legacy :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet command is supported for the VIDeo, LINE, EXT1, and EXT2 triggers. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Zero Span Delay Comp On/Off In zero span, there is a natural delay in the signal path, which comes from the RBW filter.  This is usually desirable, as it allows you to trigger on events and also see those events, because the signal is delayed from the trigger event.  ...

  • Page 373: Trigger Level

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger State Saved Saved in instrument state Status Bits/OPC dependencies The Status Operation Register bit 5 "Waiting for Trigger" is set at the same time as the Sweeping or Measuring bit is set. It is cleared when the trigger actually occurs (that is, after the trigger event occurs and all the applicable trigger criteria have been met).

  • Page 374: Trig Delay

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger Preset POSitive State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:EXTernal2:SLOPe Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility The legacy :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe command affects the slopes for the VID, LINE, EXT1, EXT2, Notes and RFB triggers. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Trig Delay Controls a time delay during which the analyzer will wait to begin a sweep after meeting the trigger criteria.

  • Page 375: Auto/Holdoff

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger from the trigger event.   However, in some cases it is desirable to eliminate this delay, so that trigger events line up exactly with the zero time point in zero span.  You can use the Zero Span Delay Comp On/Off feature to enable or disable zero span delay compensation.

  • Page 376: Trig Holdoff

    7  Trigger Functions Trigger :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger:STATe? Example TRIG:ATR:STAT ON TRIG:ATR 100 ms Notes The "time that the analyzer will wait" starts when the analyzer is ready for a trigger, which may be hundreds of ms after the data acquisition for a sweep is done. The "time" ends when the trigger condition is satisfied, not when the delay ends.

  • Page 377: Frequency Scan Measurement

    Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer EMI Receiver Mode Reference 8 Frequency Scan Measurement In the Frequency Scan measurement, the analyzer scans the band using the specified Range Table settings. The scanning can be Smooth (Swept), or Discrete (Stepped) or Time Domain. You can select up to three traces using different detectors simultaneously.
  • Page 378 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Measurement Commands for Frequency Scan CONFigure:FSCan CONFigure:FSCan:NDEFault CONFigure? INITiate:FSCan FETCh:FSCan[n]? MEASure:FSCan[n]? READ:FSCan[n]? EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 379 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Remote Command Results for Frequency Scan Command Return Value INITiate:FSCan CONFigure? name of current measurement: “FSCan” CONFigure:FSCan n/a  (selects FSC measurement in Meas Preset state) CONFigure:FSCan:NDEFault n/a (selects FSC measurement without affecting settings) FETCh:FSCan[n]? Returns a comma separated list containing detailed information in specified the following format: MEASure:FSCan[n]?
  • Page 380 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Measurement Description A complete Frequency Scan measurement consists of a series of routines, i.e. scanning, search and, a final measurement. First, the measurement scans the band based on Scan Table settings specified and activated by the user to capture the interference spectrum.

  • Page 381: Amptd Y Scale

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale AMPTD Y Scale Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the amplitude parameters. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front-panel access only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Ref Level Specifies the amplitude represented by the topmost graticule line. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Remote Command...

  • Page 382: Scale/ Div

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation <rel_ampl> [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation? Example POW:ATT 10 POW:ATT? Preset 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state. 0 dB 50 dB (CXA) 60 dB (EXA) 70 dB (MXA, PXA& N9038A) Default Unit Backwards :INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation...

  • Page 383: Presel Center

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Presel Center When this key is pressed, the centering of the preselector filter is adjusted to optimize the amplitude accuracy at the frequency of the selected marker. If the selected marker is not on when Presel Center is pressed, the analyzer will turn on the selected marker, perform a peak search, and then perform centering on the marker’s center frequency.

  • Page 384: Preselector Adjust

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale 1. If the selected marker is off, the analyzer will turn on a marker, perform a peak search, and adjust the preselector using the selected marker’s frequency. It uses the "highest peak" peak search method unqualified by threshold or excursion, so that there is no chance of a ‘no peak found’...
  • Page 385 8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale PSA had multiple preselectors, but the X-Series has only one. These commands simply alias to [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector MWAVe | MMWave | EXTernal...
  • Page 386 8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Notes The settings of Y Axis Unit and Scale Type, affect how the data is read over the remote interface. When using the remote interface no unit is returned, so you must know what the Y axis unit is to interpret the results: Example 1, set the following: Scale Type (Log)

  • Page 387: Dbmv

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale dBmV Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBmV. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW DBMV Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON.  Readback dBmV Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 388: Dbµv

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Readback Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to Ampere. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW A Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. ...

  • Page 389: Dbpw

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW DBUA Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON.  Readback dBµA Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 dBpW Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBpW.

  • Page 390: Dbµa/M

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale dBµA/m Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA/m. This is an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out.

  • Page 391: None

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit Example UNIT:POW DBG Dependencies Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 None This is selected if no Antenna Unit is currently on, however you cannot actually set this value, since it is always grayed out. ...
  • Page 392 8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale measurement. The instrument takes the preamp gain into account as it sweeps. If you sweep outside of the range of the preamp the instrument will also account for that. The displayed result will always reflect the correct gain. For some measurements, when the preamp is on and any part of the displayed frequency range is below the lowest frequency for which the preamp has specifications, a warning condition message appears in the status line. ...

  • Page 393: Low Band

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Turns the internal preamp off Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp Example :POW:GAIN OFF Readback Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Low Band Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band. The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Low Band key label.

  • Page 394: Internal Preamp State (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale "Grid Top Level (Remote Command Only)" on page 395 Internal Preamp State (Remote Command Only) This SCPI command is used to set the Internal Preamp state of the meters display. Remote Command :INPut[1]|2:GAIN[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :INPut[1]|2:GAIN[:STATe]? Example INP:GAIN ON...

  • Page 395: Grid Top Level (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Grid Top Level (Remote Command Only) This command defines the top grid level in the current unit for the scan display. This command is different from Reference level where it will adjust the scale per division based on the value set for the bottom grid level.

  • Page 396: Auto Couple

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Auto Couple Auto Couple The Auto Couple feature provides a quick and convenient way to automatically couple multiple instrument settings. This helps ensure accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range. When the Auto Couple feature is activated, either from the front panel or remotely, all parameters of the current measurement that have an Auto/Manual mode are set to Auto mode and all measurement settings dependent on (or coupled to) the Auto/Man parameters are automatically adjusted for optimal performance.
  • Page 397 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Auto Couple EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 398 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Displays the menu key that enables you to control the resolution BW. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Res BW Activates the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) action function, which allows you to manually set the RBW. Key Path Remote Command [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <freq>...

  • Page 399: Filter Bw

    Dependencies DB3|DB6|IMPulse are not available when the EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL. See error – 221.1100 in Master Error Messages: X-Series document for exact error text. Preset Preset type is based on EMC Standard Preset To key.
  • Page 400 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Readback Text The currently selected Filter BW Backwards SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix 1|2 is irrelevant to the SCPI Notes measurement; they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Initial S/W Revision A.10.00 Remote Command...

  • Page 401: Cont

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Cont Cont Sets the Frequency Scan for continuous operation. See "Continuous/ Single Scan " on page 573 for more information. If you are already in continuous scan, pressing the Continuous key has no effect. If scan sequence is in Scan only and no active scan is running, pressing the Continuous key starts a new scan.

  • Page 402: File

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement File File "File" on page 266 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 403: Freq Channel

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement FREQ Channel FREQ Channel Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the frequency parameters and scale type. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Frequency Sets the frequency of Meters in the Frequency Scan measurement. For the Strip Chart measurement, this key will set the frequency for both meters and strip chart.

  • Page 404: Start Frequency

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement FREQ Channel Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:MIDSpan <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:MIDSpan? Example FREQ:MIDS 140 MHZ FREQ:MIDS? Notes The Max values are depending on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526) Dependencies TheFrequency can be limited by Start or Stop Freq limits, if the Span is so large that Start or Stop reaches their limit.

  • Page 405: Stop Frequency

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement FREQ Channel and Stop. With the knob or step keys: Cannot increment the Start Freq to a value greater than the Stop Freq – 10 Hz. If already in zero span, you cannot increment at all, and the first decrement will be forced to at least 10 Hz. The Start Frequency can be limited by Span limits, if the Stop Frequency is below its preset value.

  • Page 406: Freq/ Step

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement FREQ Channel FREQ:STOP:AUTO 1 FREQ:STOP:AUTO? Notes The Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526) Dependencies By direct entry: You cannot set the Stop frequency < the Start frequency. You cannot set the Start frequency = the Stop frequency.

  • Page 407: Scale Type

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement FREQ Channel Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? Example FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON FREQ:CENT:STEP 500 MHz FREQ:CENT UP increases the current center frequency value by 500 MHz FREQ:CENT:STEP? FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO? Notes Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 508, 513, 526) Preset Auto State Saved...
  • Page 408 8  Frequency Scan Measurement FREQ Channel Preset LOGarithmic State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range Log | Lin Backwards :DISPlay:WINDow[1]|2:TRACe[1]|2|3:X:SPACing Compatibility SCPI :DISPlay[:WINDow]:TRACe[1]|2|3:X:SPACing Backwards Compatibility These commands above are included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 and [1]|2|3 are irrelevant SCPI Notes to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility.

  • Page 409: Input/Output

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Input/Output Input/Output "Input/Output" on page 150 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 410: Marker

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Marker Accesses the Marker menu. The functions in this menu include a 1-of-N selection of the control mode Normal, Delta or Off for the selected marker. If the selected marker is Off, pressing Marker sets it to Normal and places it at the center of the screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules.

  • Page 411: Delta

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker A Normal mode (POSition type) marker can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis value. Its absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value. Key Path Marker Example...

  • Page 412: Select Marker

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “Selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions. Key Path Marker, Properties Notes Front panel only. The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is done or a Marker Function is turned on.

  • Page 413: Couple Markers

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Example CALC:FSC:MARK:TRAC 1 CALC:FSC:MARK:TRAC? Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating. Couplings Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected. Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state.

  • Page 414: Marker X Axis Value (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Marker X Axis Value (Remote Command Only) The command below sets the marker X Axis value in the current marker X Axis Scale unit. In each case the marker that is addressed becomes the selected marker. It has no effect (other than to cause the marker to become selected) if the control mode is Off, but it is the SCPI equivalent of entering an X value if the control mode is Normal orDelta.

  • Page 415: Normal Marker State (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker "Normal Marker Y Axis Value (Remote Command Only)" on page 415 "Delta Marker State (Remote Command Only)" on page 416 "Delta Marker X Axis Value (Remote Command Only)" on page 416 "Delta Marker Y Axis Value (Remote Command Only)" on page 416 Normal Marker State (Remote Command Only) Toggles the Normal marker state on and off.

  • Page 416: Delta Marker State (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Delta Marker State (Remote Command Only) Toggles the Delta marker state on and off. Remote Command :CALCulate[1]|2:DELTamarker[1]|2|...|4[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :CALCulate[1]|2:DELTamarker[1]|2|...|4[:STATe]? Example CALC:DELT3 ON  Turn on maker 3 in Delta mode.  Notes This SCPI is Meas Local and Context Sensitive. This SCPI alias to :CALC:FSC:MARK[1]|2|3|4:MODE DELT.

  • Page 417: Marker Function

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Function Marker Function Displays the menu keys that enable you to do marker related functions. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Select Marker Specifies the selected marker. The term “Selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify which marker will be affected by the functions.

  • Page 418: Measure At Marker Window

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Function Dependencies This key is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...

  • Page 419: Detectors (Measure)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Function Remote Command :DISPlay:FSCan:WINDow:MAMarker:POSition ULEFt | LLEFt | URIGht | LRIGht :DISPlay:FSCan:WINDow:MAMarker:POSition? Example DISP:FSC:WIND:MAM:POS LRIG DISP:FSC:WIND:MAM:POS? Notes ULEFt= Upper Left LLEFt= Lower Left URIGht= Upper Right LRIGht= Lower Right Preset ULEFt State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range Upper Left| Lower Left| Upper Right|Lower Right Readback Text...

  • Page 420: Dwell Time

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Function Key Path Meas Setup, Detectors (Measure) Notes Front panel only. The selected final detector is remembered even when not in the Detector Menu. Preset Detector 1, not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults. State Saved Saved in instrument state.

  • Page 421: Detector

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Function Detector Specifies the selected detector to be used for the Final Measurement and Measure at Marker, or to turn the selected Detector off. If you use the front panel to change the detector type, the following message will appear to remind you that the change of the detector will cause the data of the particular detector type column to be discarded.

  • Page 422: Center Presel On/Off

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Function Key Path Meas Setup, Detectors (Measure) Remote Command [:SENSe]:FSCan:FINal:DETector[1]|2|3:LDELta <limit Num> [:SENSe]:FSCan:FINal:DETector[1]|2|3:LDELta? Example :FSC:FIN:DET3:LDEL 2  Set limit line 2 to be used by detector 3. Notes Not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults. Dependencies This key is grayed out during final measurement.

  • Page 423: Marker Zoom Out

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker Function Notes If the selected marker is parked at a point near to the edge of the trace data, the span after zoom will remain at 10% of span. If the selected marker is parked at a point out of current display, the start/stop frequencies will be set to Auto first to full zoom out before performing Marker Zoom.

  • Page 424: Marker To

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker To Marker To Displays the menu keys that enable you to append new elements into the existing signal list. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Marker à List Appends the frequency where the selected marker is in the signal list. The location of the newly added signal depends on the auto sort setting.

  • Page 425: Mkr À Meters (Move Meters To Marker Freq)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker To Mkr à Meters (Move Meters to Marker Freq) Replaces Frequency (Meters) with the frequency identified by the selected marker. Key Path Marker To Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:TO:METer Example CALC:FSC:MARK2:TO:MET Couplings If no marker is ON when this operation is performed, the default marker will be turned on. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Metersà...

  • Page 426: Snap To Meters (Select Closest Signal)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Marker To Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:APPend:METer Example CALC:FSC:SLIS:APP:MET  Append signal obtained at meters into signal list. Notes If there is no free space in the signal list, the following prompt  message will ask you whether to continue or not: WARNING! There is not enough free space in Signal List. Would you like to clear the Signal list before adding signals? ...

  • Page 427: Meas

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Meas The information in this section is common to all measurements. For key and remote command information for a specific measurement, refer to the section that describes the measurement of interest. Measurements available under the Meas key are specific to the current Mode. When viewing Help for measurements, note the following: Operation for some keys differs between measurements.

  • Page 428: Measurement Group Of Commands

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Measurement Group of Commands Measure Commands: :MEASure:<measurement>[n]? This is a fast single-command way to make a measurement using the factory default instrument settings. These are the settings and units that conform to the Mode Setup settings (e.g. radio standard) that you have currently selected. •...
  • Page 429 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas the factory default instrument settings. It does not initiate the taking of measurement data unless INIT:CONTinuous is ON. If you change any measurement settings after using the CONFigure command, the READ command can be used to initiate a measurement without changing the settings back to their defaults.

  • Page 430: Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas measurement and you send READ:ACP? it will initiate a new measurement using the same instrument settings. • Initiates the measurement and puts valid data into the output buffer. If a measurement other than the current one is specified, the instrument will switch to that measurement before it initiates the measurement and returns results.

  • Page 431: Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Remote Command :CALCulate:DATA[n]? Notes The return trace depends on the measurement. In CALCulate:<meas>:DATA[n], n is any valid subopcode for the current measurement. It returns the same data as the FETCh:<measurement>? query where <measurement> is the current measurement.
  • Page 432 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas • CFIT or curve fit - applies curve fitting routines to the data. <soffset> and <length> are required to define the data that you want. <roffset> is an optional parameter for the desired order of the curve equation. The query will return the following values: the x-offset (in seconds) and the curve coefficients ((order + 1) values).
  • Page 433 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas • RMS - returns a single value that is the average power on a root-mean-squared voltage scale (arithmetic rms) of the data point values for the specified region(s) of trace data. See the following equation. For I/Q trace data, the rms of the magnitudes of the I/Q pairs is returned.
  • Page 434 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas where Xi is a data point value, X is the arithmetic mean of the data point values for the specified region (s), and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s). where |Xi| is the magnitude of an I/Q pair, X is the mean of the magnitudes for the specified region(s), and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s).
  • Page 435 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Sample Trace Data - Not Constant Envelope (See below for explanation of variables.) <soffset> - start offset is an optional real number. (It is in seconds for time-domain traces, and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints – 1, for frequency-domain traces). It specifies the amount of data at the beginning of the trace that will be ignored before the decimation process starts.

  • Page 436: Calculate Peaks Of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Returns a list of all the peaks for the currently selected measurement and sub-opcode [n]. The peaks must meet the requirements of the peak threshold and excursion values. n = any valid sub-opcode for the current measurement.

  • Page 437: Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas excursion value stored under the Peak Criteria menu. Values must be provided for threshold and excursion. The sorting and display line parameters are optional (defaults are AMPLitude and ALL). Note that there is always a Y-axis value for the display line, regardless of whether the display line state is on or off.

  • Page 438: Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas The specs for each output type follow: ASCii - Amplitude values are in ASCII, in the current Y Axis Unit, one ASCII character per digit, values separated by commas, each value in the form: SX.YYYYYEsZZ Where: S = sign (+ or -) X = one digit to left of decimal point...

  • Page 439: Meas Setup

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Meas Setup Displays the menu keys that enable you to set up the measurement. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Select Signal Specifies the selected signal. The term “Selected signal” is used throughout this document to specify which signal will be affected by the functions.

  • Page 440: Navigate

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Dependencies Couplings When the signal list is cleared, this value will reset to 0. Preset If the signal list is empty, =0 If the signal list is not empty, = number of peaks in signal list table State Saved Saved in instrument state.

  • Page 441: Scroll Left

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Scroll Left Scroll signal list to the left. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Navigate Notes Front panel only. Dependencies This key is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated.

  • Page 442: Select Signal

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Select Signal Specifies the selected signal. The term “Selected signal” is used throughout this document to specify which signal will be affected by the functions. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Mark Signals Notes Front panel only.

  • Page 443: Clear Mark

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Marks all duplicate signals. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Mark Signals, Mark Duplicates Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:MARK:DUPLicates[:ALL] Example CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:DUPL Notes If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed. Dependencies This key is grayed out when a scan sequence is running.

  • Page 444: Mark All

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Mark Signals Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:MARK:CLEar:SIGNal <integer> Example CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:CLE:SIGN 11  Clear mark from signal #11. Notes If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed. If the selected signal is not in the list, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed.

  • Page 445: Select Signal

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Select Signal Specifies the selected signal. The term “Selected signal” is used throughout this document to specify which signal will be affected by the functions. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Delete Signals Notes...

  • Page 446: Delete All

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Delete All Marks and deletes all signals in the signal list. If you accessed this function from the front panel, the following message will prompt you for confirmation to delete all signals from the signal list. This will delete all signals. ...

  • Page 447: Signal Zoom

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Please press Enter or OK to proceed. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Delete Signals Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:DELete:UNMarked Example CALC:FSC:SLIS:DEL:UNM Notes If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed. When signals in the signal list were successfully deleted, an advisory is generated.

  • Page 448: Sort Signals

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Dependencies This key is grayed out before Marker Zoom is performed. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–200, Execution error”...

  • Page 449: By Det Amptd Type

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup By Det Amptd Type Specifies that the elements in the signal list will be sorted based on the detector amplitude type. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Sort Signals, By Detector Amplitude Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:DAMPlitude DET1|DET2|DET3 :CALCulate:FSCan:SLISt:SORT:DAMPlitude ? Example...

  • Page 450: Sort Order

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup By Time Specifies that the elements in the signal list will be sorted based on time. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Sort Signals Example CALC:FSC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE TIME Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Sort Order Chooses between ascending and descending sort order. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Sort Signals Remote Command...

  • Page 451: Comment

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range On|Off Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Comment Sets an ASCII comment field for each signal in list, which will be shown in the “Comment” column of the signal list.

  • Page 452: Scan Table

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict; Function not available with time domain scan type” warning. Couplings When Time Domain is selected as the Scan Type, the Step Control is automatically set to Step Size &...

  • Page 453: Start Freq

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Dependencies This key is grayed out during multi range scanning. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict;...

  • Page 454: Stop Freq

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup in zero span, you cannot increment at all, and the first decrement will be forced to at least 10 Hz. Couplings If you change the start frequency of the selected range to a value < the previous range’s stop frequency (where the previous range is turned on), the stop frequency of the previous range will be changed to the same value.
  • Page 455 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Stop frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop. You cannot set the Stop Frequency to a value that would create a span of less than 10 Hz. If you try to do any of these, the Start Frequency will change to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference between the Start and Stop.

  • Page 456: Display Scan Table

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup FSC:SCAN8:BAND? FSC:SCAN4:BAND:AUTO 1 ! Turn on Auto Res BW for Range 4. FSC:SCAN4:BAND:AUTO? Notes For numeric entries, the RBW chooses the nearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up) available RBW to the value entered. Notes You are not allowed to select between Auto/ Man RBW in ESU.

  • Page 457: Dwell Time

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Example CALC:FSC:SCAN:DISP OFF  Turn off scan table editor. CALC:FSC:SCAN:DISP? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range G1|G2|OFF Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Dwell Time Specifies the dwell time for each step size defined in the selected range. Key Path Meas Setup, Scan Table Remote Command...

  • Page 458: Step Size

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup 10 kHz 100 s 100 us 100 kHz 30 s 10 us 120 kHz 30 s 10 us 1 MHz 10 us Couplings When you change the value of the dwell time, the scan time of the selected range will be changed accordingly, based on the calculation Scan Time = Dwell Time x (ScanPoints –...
  • Page 459 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Example FSC:SCAN2:STEP 100kHz  Set the step size of Range 2 to 100 kHz. FSC:SCAN2:STEP? FSC:SCAN3:STEP:AUTO 1 ! Turn on Auto Step Size in range 3. FSC:SCAN3:STEP:AUTO? Notes When set to auto, the selected Auto Step Size Rules will be used to calculate the step size. Points/ RBW Scan point is calculated based on the number of points for each RBW width, the smallest odd number >= Number of Points*(Stop Frequency-Start Frequency)/RBW will be used as the scan...

  • Page 460: Scan Time

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup No rules for entries during Discrete (Stepped) Scan. If user changes the step size to a value that causing the total range point to exceed 40001, range state of the specific range will be changed to off. An advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...

  • Page 461: Scan Points

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Dependencies This key is grayed out when the Step Control is set to “Step Size & Dwell Time”. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict;...

  • Page 462: Auto Step Size Rules

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:POINts:AUTO ON|OFF|1|0 [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:POINts:AUTO? Example FSC:SCAN2:POIN 200  Set Range 2 to have 200 points. FSC:SCAN2:POIN? FSC:SCAN3:POIN:AUTO 1 ! Turn on Auto Scan Points in range 3. FSC:SCAN3:POIN:AUTO? Notes When set to auto, the selected Auto Step Size Rules will be used to calculate the scan points. Points/ RBW The Scan point is calculated based on the number of points for each RBW width, the smallest odd number >= Number of Points*(Stop Frequency-Start Frequency)/RBW will be used as the scan...

  • Page 463: Points/ Rbw

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Scan Table Remote Command [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:RULes PRBW|LPCT [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:RULes? Example FSC:SCAN3:RUL LPCT  Set Range 3 to use auto rules of Log % of Freq FSC:SCAN3:RUL? Dependencies This key is grayed out during multi range scanning. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated.
  • Page 464 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. This key is grayed out during Time Domain Scan.If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated.

  • Page 465: Attenuation

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Attenuation Specifies the attenuation of the selected range. Only the mechanical attenuator is available in the Frequency Scan measurement. Key Path Meas Setup, Scan Table Remote Command [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:INPut:ATTenuation <rel_ampl>...
  • Page 466 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:POWer:GAIN[:STATe]? Example FSC:SCAN4:POW:GAIN ON  Turn on Internal Preamp of Range 4. FSC:SCAN4:POW:GAIN? Dependencies Preamp is not available on all hardware platforms. If the preamp is not present or is unlicensed, the key is not shown. This key is grayed out during multi range scanning.

  • Page 467: Autorange

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup SCAN5:INP:GAIN? Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 of SENSe node is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. ON is aliased to :SCAN:POW:GAIN ON; :SCAN:POW:GAIN:BAND LOW for the selected range. OFF is aliased to :SCAN:POW:GAIN OFF for the selected range.

  • Page 468: Rf Input Port

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Remote Command [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:POWer:GAIN:AUTO ON|OFF|1|0 [:SENSe]:FSCan:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:POWer:GAIN:AUTO? Example FSC:SCAN4:POW:GAIN:AUTO ON   Turn on Auto preamp for Range 4 FSC:SCAN4:POW:GAIN:AUTO? Dependencies This key is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated.

  • Page 469: Range Presets

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup [:SENSe]:SCAN[1]|2|...|10:INPut:TYPE? Example SCAN2:INP:TYPE INPUT1 Notes This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Range à SA This key will propagate the setting of the currently selected range to the Swept SA measurement in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode.
  • Page 470 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Scan Table, Range Presets Remote Command [:SENSe]:FSCan:RANGe[1]|2|...|10:PRESet CISA | CISB | CISC | CISD | CISCD | CISE | MIL1K | MIL10K | MIL150K | MIL30M | MIL1G | MILGT1G Example FSC:RANG:PRES CISA ...

  • Page 471: Scan Sequence

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup sweep point. The Step Size is calculated by this formula: Step Size = (Stop Frequency—Start Frequency)/ (Sweep Point-–1). Selecting a MIL Preset will set the start/ stop frequencies, step size (in according to sweep point), and RBW of the selected range according to the table values shown below.
  • Page 472 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup to move the marker around on the trace(s). You may Pause or Stop the scan from the Sweep/ Control menu. If there are no ranges turned on in scan table, an error is generated and the scan cannot be performed. Search: If Search is part of the current Scan Sequence, once the scan is complete, the measurement searches for peaks on the trace(s).
  • Page 473 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Frequency Resolution BW Freq < 1 kHz 10 Hz 1 kHz ≤ Freq < 10 kHz 100 Hz 10 kHz  ≤Freq < 150 kHz 1 kHz 150 kHz  ≤Freq < 30 MHz 10 kHz 30 MHz ...

  • Page 474: Continuous

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Continuous The scan will run continuously until you stop it by pressing the Stop key in the Sweep Control menu. Key Path Meas Setup, Scan Sequence Example FSC:SEQ SCAN Dependencies This key is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated.

  • Page 475: Scan And Search

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Remote Command INITiate[1]|2:EMITest Example INIT:EMIT Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility This ESU Command is alias to FSC:SEQ SSAM;INIT Scan and Search When this key is selected, pressing Start performs a scan and search.

  • Page 476: Detectors (Measure)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Dependencies This key is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...

  • Page 477: Select Detector

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Select Detector Specifies the selected detector. The “selected detector” is the detector that other parameters under the Final Measurement and Measure at Marker Detector menu will apply to. Key Path Meas Setup, Detectors (Measure) Notes Front panel only.

  • Page 478: Detector

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup 60 s Default Unit Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Detector Specifies the selected detector to be used for the Final Measurement and Measure at Marker, or to turn the selected Detector off. If you use the front panel to change the detector type, the following message will appear to remind you that the change of the detector will cause the data of the particular detector type column to be discarded.

  • Page 479: Limit For

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Limit for ∆ Selects the limit used by each final detector or measure at marker to get the limit delta value that goes in the Signal List. If you use the front panel to change the detector type,  the following message will appear  to remind you ...

  • Page 480: Auto Preamp

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup :FSC:FIN:ATT:AUTO? Dependencies This key is grayed out during final measurement. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...

  • Page 481: Scan Type

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup New avg = ((K–1)Old avg + New data)/K, where K is the number of averages accumulated. (In continuous mode, once K has reached the # of Scans, K stays at that value, providing a continuous running average.) Key Path Meas Setup Remote Command...

  • Page 482: Time Domain Setup

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Smooth|Discrete|Time Domain Readback Text Smooth|Discrete|Time Domain Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:MODE CW|FIXed|SWEep|SCAN|TDOMain [:SENSe]:FREQuency:MODE? Example FREQ:MODE SCAN FREQ:MODE? Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 of SENSe node is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility.

  • Page 483: Limits

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Limits Opens the Limit Lines menu that contains keys to control limit lines of the current measurement.  Only the upper limit is used in the Frequency Scan measurement. Key Path Meas Setup State Saved Saved in instrument state.

  • Page 484: Properties

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup When the limits are frequency limits but the trace is a zero-span trace, the limit trace is drawn at the limit amplitude of the center frequency.  When the limits are time limits but the trace is a frequency domain trace, the limit trace is drawn according to the current time axis, with the left of the screen being 0 and the right being equal to sweep time.

  • Page 485: Interpolation

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup A trace can have multiple limit lines simultaneously; in that case, only one upper limit line will affect the color of the trace. Other limit lines will be displayed, and will affect the pass/fail status, but the trace will not turn red if it crosses a secondary limit line.
  • Page 486 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup For log amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: For log amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: Note that Interpolation modes determine how limit values are computed between points in the limit table. The appearance of a limit trace is also affected by the amplitude scale, which may be linear or logarithmic.

  • Page 487: Fixed/ Relative

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Fixed/ Relative Accesses a menu that enables you to specify that the selected limit is relative to either the Center Frequency or the Reference level. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Properties Readback [Fixed] – if both Relative to CF and RL set to OFF. [Rel to RL] – if only RL set to ON. [Rel to CF] – if only CF set to ON.

  • Page 488: Description

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Relative to RL Chooses whether the limit line amplitude points are coupled to the instrument reference level, and whether the amplitude points are expressed as an offset from the instrument reference level. For example, assume you have a limit line, and the reference level at –10 dBm. If Relative to RL is “Off”, entering a limit line segment with an amplitude coordinate of –20 dB displays the limit line segment at –20 dBm, and the limit line segment will not change amplitude if the reference level amplitude changes.

  • Page 489: Comment

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Comment Sets an ASCII comment field, which will be stored in an exported file. The comment can be displayed in the active function area by selecting it as the active function, if desired to be in a screen dump. The Limits .csv file supports this field.

  • Page 490: Edit Limit

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Preset Not affected by Mode Preset, set to 0 dB for all Limits by Restore Mode Defaults. State Saved Saved in instrument state. –40 dB 0 dB Default Unit Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Edit Limit Opens the Table Editor for the selected limit line.

  • Page 491: Insert Point Below

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Edit Notes There is no value readback on the key –1000 dBm 1000 dBm Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 Insert Point Below Pressing this key inserts a point below the current point.  The new point is a copy of the current point. And becomes the current point ...

  • Page 492: Build From Trace

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Build From Trace Builds a limit using an existing trace. This command will overwrite all data in the limit. Since a straight copy would typically have hundreds or thousands of segments, the data will be approximated to better represent a limit line;...

  • Page 493: Scale X Axis

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup –500 GHz 500 GHz Default Unit Determined by X axis scale. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Y Offset Offsets all segments in the limit line by some specified amplitude. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Edit, Offset Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:OFFSet:Y <rel_ampl>...

  • Page 494: Search Criteria

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup For frequency limits and a frequency-domain X-axis, sets the Start and Stop Frequency to contain the minimum and maximum Frequency of the selected Limit.  The range between Start Frequency and Stop Frequency is 12.5% above the range between the minimum and maximum Frequency so that the span exceeds this range by one graticule division on either side. ...

  • Page 495: Peak Criteria Only

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Peak Criteria Only When this key is selected, performing search or issuing the equivalent remote command will add peaks into the signal list, subject to the peak-criteria qualifications defined in section"Peak Criteria" on page 516 Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Search Criteria Example...

  • Page 496: Of Subranges

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Example FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN 10 FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN? FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN:STAT OFF ! Turns off # of Peaks. Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 # of Subranges Determines how many ranges that the whole span from Start Frequency to Stop Frequency will be divided to when Search Criteria is set to “Subranges and Limits”.

  • Page 497: Update Δ Limits

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup If the trace has no enabled limits, or the trace itself is not displayed, no message is displayed for that trace. The PASS/FAIL box in the corner of the Meas Bar is only displayed if there is at least one “Trace Pass/Fail” indication displayed in the graticule.

  • Page 498: Delete All Limits

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup When this key is pressed a prompt is placed on the screen that says “Please press Enter or OK key to delete limit. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The deletion is only performed if you press OK or Enter;...

  • Page 499: Trace Fail? (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup SCPI Notes measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Trace Fail? (Remote Command Only) Tests a trace against all associated limit lines. Returns a 0 if the trace is within all limits and margins, a 1 if the trace exceed either the limit or the margin.

  • Page 500: Limit Line Upper (Remote Command Only, Scpi Standard Compatibility)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Example CALC:FSC:LLIN:CONT:POIN?  Returns the number of points in the limit line. Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Limit Line Upper (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard compatibility) Defines a list of amplitude values for a given limit line. Changing the number of elements in the list spectrum will automatically turn the limit line off.

  • Page 501: Analog Demod Tune And Listen

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Analog Demod Tune and Listen The Analog Demod Tune and Listen key opens the Analog Demod menu that contains keys to turn the demod function on and off and select modulation type. When the function is on (set to AM, FM, or ΦM), the demodulated signal is fed to the analyzer’s speaker. Muting and volume control functions are done through the standard Windows speaker volume control interface.

  • Page 502: De-Emphasis (Fm Demod Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Pressing this key, when it is not selected, selects and activates the FM demodulation function. Pressing it a second time branches to the FM Demod menu where FM demodulation settings can be adjusted. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Example FSC:DEM FM ...
  • Page 503 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod, FM, De-emphasis Example FSC:DEM:FM:DEEM US25 25 ∝s Readback Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 50 µs Sets the De-emphasis time constant to 50 µs. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod, FM, De-emphasis Example FSC:DEM:FM:DEEM US50 50 ∝s...

  • Page 504: Lisn Control (Measure)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Pressing this key, turns the demodulation function off. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Example :FSC:DEM OFF  Turns off demodulation function. State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 LISN Control (Measure) This menu enables you to access LISN related functions.

  • Page 505: Settings

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Settings This menu enables you to access the LISN control menu. Key Path Meas Setup, LISN Control ReadBack [<Phase>, <HighPass>, <ProtectiveEarth>] in the format of [N|L1|L2|L3|,HP,GRO|FLO] HP would be shown when the 150KHz HighPass is turn on. GRO stands for is for grounded and FLO stands for floating.

  • Page 506: Protective Earth

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup :SENSe1|SENSe2|[:SENSe]:FMEasurement:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe]? Example :FME:LISN:FILT:HPAS ON Notes This key is only available when ENV216 V-network is selected. Dependencies This key is grayed out when V-network other than ENV216 is selected. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated.

  • Page 507: Mark Signal (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup Mark Signal (Remote Command Only) Marks signals based on the selected parameter, either current, duplicate or all. Remote Command :CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:MARK CURRent|DUPLicate|ALL Example CALC:EMI:SLIS:MARK DUPL  Marks duplicated signals. Notes CURRent aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK <integer> where integer is the currently selected signal. DUPLicate aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:DUPL ALL aliases to :CALC:FSC:SLIS:MARK:ALL Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 508: Final Measurement (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Dependencies This function is not available when a scan sequence is running. If the SCPI command is sent, the message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. Couplings When 0, all ranges will be turned off.

  • Page 509: No Of Peaks (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Meas Setup No of Peaks (Remote Command Only) This command defines the number of subranges or peaks for the determination of the peak list. Remote Command CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges <integer> CALCulate[1]|2:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges? Example CALC:PEAK:SUBR 10 CALC:PEAK:SUBR? Notes This command is alias to FSC:SEAR:PEAK:COUN; FSC:SEAR:SUBR:COUN, which actually set # of peaks and # of subranges.

  • Page 510: Mode

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Mode Mode "Mode" on page 222 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 511: Mode Preset

    In the X-Series, the legacy “Factory Preset” has been replaced with Mode Preset, which only presets Notes the currently active mode, not the entire instrument.  In the X-Series, the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System, Restore System Defaults All, which behaves essentially the same way as restore System Defaults does on ESA and PSA.

  • Page 512: How-To Preset

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Mode Preset User Preset. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 How-To Preset The table below shows all possible presets, their corresponding SCPI commands and front-panel access (key paths). Instrument settings depend on the current measurement context. Some settings are local to the current measurement, some are global (common) across all the measurements in the current mode, and some are global to all the available modes.
  • Page 513 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset :SYSTem:PON:TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset :SYSTem:PON:TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State :SYSTem:PON:TYPE LAST System Menu EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 514: Mode Setup

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup "Mode Setup" on page 246 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 515: Peak Search

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Peak Search Peak Search Accesses Peak Search settings and performs a peak search. If no peak is found, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed. Key Path Front-panel key Remote Command :CALCulate:FSCan:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:MAXimum Example CALC:FSC:MARK2:MAX ...

  • Page 516: Next Peak Left

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Peak Search Next Peak Left Moves the selected marker to the nearest peak to the left of the current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria. If there is no valid peak to the left of the current marker position, an error is generated and the marker is not moved.

  • Page 517: Peak Search Criteria

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Peak Search Peak Search Criteria This menu lets you decide the mode of Peak Search. When Highest Peak is selected, pressing Peak Search finds the highest peak on the marker’s trace. If Same as “Next Peak” Criteria is selected, then the search is also forced to consider the Excursion and Threshold found under the “Next Peak”...

  • Page 518: Next Peak Criteria

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Peak Search Next Peak Criteria This key opens a menu that allows you to independently set the Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold and turn them on and off. Key Path Peak Search, Peak Criteria Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Pk Excursion On/Off Turns the peak excursion requirement on/off and sets the excursion value.

  • Page 519: Pk Threshold On/Off

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Peak Search Pk Threshold On/Off Turns the peak threshold requirement on/off and sets the threshold value. The peak threshold value defines the minimum signal level (or min threshold) that the peak identification algorithm uses to recognize a peak.

  • Page 520: Print

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Print Print "Print" on page 271 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 521: Quick Save

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Quick Save Quick Save The Quick Save front-panel key repeats the most recent save that was performed from the Save menu, with the following exceptions: • Register saves are not remembered as Saves for the purpose of the Quick Save function •...
  • Page 522 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Quick Save If you enter a file name for a given file type, then the prefix becomes the filename you entered instead of the default prefix, followed by an underscore. The last four letters (the suffix) are the 4-digit number. For example, if you save a measurement results file as “fred.csv”, then the next auto file name chosen for a measurement results save will be fred_0000.csv.

  • Page 523: Recall

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall Recall The recall key accesses the menu that allows you to load a measurement state and data from external files or registers. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 State The Recall State menu lets you choose a register or file from which to recall the state.  The content of a state file includes all of the settings and data required to return the analyzer as closely as possible to the Mode it was in, with the exact settings that were in place, when the save occurred.

  • Page 524: More Information

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall matches, a full recall proceeds by aborting the currently running measurement, clearing any pending operations, and then loading the State from the saved state file. You can open state files from any mode, so recalling a State file switches to the mode that was active when the save occurred. After switching to the mode of the saved state file, mode settings and data (if any for the mode) are loaded with values from the saved file.

  • Page 525: From File

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall You want all traces to load exactly Save State On recall, all traces’ mode and data as they were when saved. will be exactly as they were when saved.  Any traces that were updating willhave their data immediately overwritten.

  • Page 526: Edit Register Names

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths; the Enter key to open a directory; and the Backspace key to go back one directory.

  • Page 527: Register 1 Thru Register 16

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall Key Path Recall, State Mode Dependencies N9060A–7FP or N9060B–2FP license required to edit the register names.  When the feature is not licensed, sending the SCPI command generates an error, –221,"Settings conflict;Option not available" Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 Register 1 thru Register 16 Selecting any one of these register keys causes the State of the mode from the specified Register to be...

  • Page 528: Data (Import)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall modified. In addition, you can use the Edit Register Names key under Save, State to enter custom names for each register. Registers are shared by all modes, so recalling from any one of the registers will cause a mode switch to the mode that was active when the save to the Register occurred.

  • Page 529: Amplitude Correction

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall Notes The menu is built from whatever data types are available for the mode. Some keys will be missing completely, so the key locations in the sub-menu will vary. No SCPI command directly controls the Data Type that this key controls. The Data Type is included in the MMEM:LOAD commands.

  • Page 530: Default Directory

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall Couplings When a correction file is loaded from mass storage, it is automatically turned on (Correction ON) and ApplyCorrections is set to On. This allows you to see its effect, thus confirming the load. Readback selected Correction Backwards :MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection ANTenna | CABLe | OTHer | USER, <filename>...

  • Page 531: Limit

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall myTrace2.csv in the current path. The default path is My Documents\EMI\data\xxx\traces where xxx is the measurement name. Dependencies A trace cannot be recalled from a trace file that was exported with ALL traces selected. A trace cannot be imported if the number of trace points in the file do not match the number of sweep points currently set for the measurement. ...

  • Page 532: Signal List

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall saved the limit line data to. Otherwise, the default recall directory is My Documents\EMC Limits and Ampcor\Limits, which contains a set of preloaded limit files. Key Path Recall, Export Data, Limit Remote Command :MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit:DDIRectory USER|PRELoaded Example :MMEM:LOAD:LIM:DDIR USER Select user :MMEM:LOAD:LIM:DDIR?

  • Page 533: Scan Table

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall Scan Table Selects the scan table as the data type to be imported. Key Path Recall, Data Remote Command :MMEMory:LOAD:SCAN <filename> Example MMEM:LOAD:SCAN “myScanTable1.csv” Imports the Scan Table from the file myScanTable1.csv in the default path. Notes If the file is empty, error –250.3005 is reported.

  • Page 534: Trace

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall Default Directory Specifies the default directory used for loading of Amplitude Correction. If user is selected, the default recall directory is the default (My Documents\amplitudeCorrections) or the last directory you saved the amplitude correction data to.  Otherwise, the default recall directory is My Documents\EMC Limits and Ampcor\Ampcor, which contains a set of preloaded amplitude correction files in the directory called Ampcor. ...

  • Page 535: Limit

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall Readback 1|2|3 Status Bits/OPC Sequential - aborts the current measurement. dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Limit This key selects Limit Lines as the data type to be imported.  When pressed a second time, it brings up the Limits Menu, which lets you select into which Limit the data will be imported.

  • Page 536: Open

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Recall State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range User| Preloaded Readback “User”| “Preloaded” Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Open Most of the functions under this key work the same way in many measurements. For details about this key, "Open…"...

  • Page 537: Restart

    (displayed average count reset to 1) for a trace in Clear Write, but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold. In the X-Series, the Restart hardkey and the INITiate:RESTart command restart not only Trace Average, but MaxHold and MinHold traces as well.
  • Page 538 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Restart Even when set for Single operation, multiple sweeps may be taken when Restart is pressed (for example, when averaging/holding is on). Thus when we say that Restart "restarts a measurement," we may mean: • It restarts the current sweep •...

  • Page 539: Save

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Save The Save menu lets you choose what you want to save and where you want to save it. Among the types of files you can save are States, Traces, and Screen Images. In addition, an Export (Data) option lets you save a number of data types as CSV files for easy import into Excel and other spreadsheet programs.
  • Page 540 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save update. After saving to a file, the analyzer automatically returns to the previous menu and any Save As dialog goes away. Backwards :MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<filename> Compatibility SCPI For backwards compatibility, the above syntax is supported.  The "1" is simply ignored. The command is sequential.
  • Page 541 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save File/Folder List Enables you to navigate to the center of the dialog that contains the list of files and folders. Once here you can get information about the file and use the tab keys to navigate to the other fields in the dialog, such as Save In.

  • Page 542: Edit Register Names

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Key Path Save, State Mode Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a State Save Type Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys, to help you remember what you are using that state to save.

  • Page 543: Register 1 Thru Register 16

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save If you try to edit the name of an empty register, the analyzer will first save the state to have a file to put the name in. If you load a named state file into an analyzer with older firmware it will ignore the metadata. The *SAV and *RCL commands will not be affected by the custom register names, nor will the MMEM commands. ...
  • Page 544 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument, not one set for each Mode. When a state is saved, the Mode it was saved from is saved with it; then when it is recalled, the instrument switches to that Mode. After the save completes, the corresponding register menu key annotation is updated with the date and time and the message "Register <register number>...

  • Page 545: Data (Export)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Data (Export) Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage files. The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current measurement. Since the commonly exported data files are in .csv format, the data can be edited by you  prior to importing. This allows youto export a data file, manipulate the data in Excel (the most common PC Application for manipulating .csv files) and then import it.

  • Page 546: Correction Data File

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Dependencies Corrections are not supported by all Measurements. If in a Mode in which some Measurements support it, this key will be grayed out in measurements that do not. The key will not show at all if no measurements in the Mode support it.
  • Page 547 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Line Type of field Example Notes Freq Interpolation Frequency Interpolation,Linear if omitted leaves the Freq Interpolation unchanged.   Allowable values:  Linear, Logarithmic Bias value in mA Bias,0.00 If omitted leaves the Bias value unchanged (added as of A.08.50) Bias State Bias State,On If omitted leaves the Bias State...

  • Page 548: Trace

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save • 17 dB at 210 MHz • 14.8 dB at 225 MHz Then the file will look like: • Amplitude Correction • "Correction Factors for 11966E" • "Class B Radiated" • A.02.06,N9020A • P13 EA3 UK6,01 • Frequency Unit,MHz •...

  • Page 549: Frequency Scan Trace File Content

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Using the C: drive is strongly discouraged, since it runs the risk of being overwritten during an instrument software upgrade. Both single and double quotes are supported for any filename parameter over SCPI. Dependencies Traces cannot be recalled from a trace file that was saved with ALL traces selected. Readback 1|2|3|All Status Bits/OPC...

  • Page 550: Strip Chart Trace File Content

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save 30540022.27 –90.66836416 30600024.74 –87.10931161 Strip Chart Trace File Content The following file example shows the Trace file content in Excel. AllTrace EMI:SCHart A.07.00_R0009 N9020A 526 EA3 B25 P26 PFR Frequency 600000000 Freq Offset Attenuation Y Axis Unit dBuV Ref Level Offset Internal Preamp State...

  • Page 551: Monitor Spectrum Trace File Content

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save –0.4 23.6549108 20.186032 12.352822 –0.45 23.1558073 20.184001 12.356569 –0.5 23.8378283 20.171481 12.352344 –0.55 24.0481835 20.148553 12.329247 –0.6 23.7659679 20.165786 12.308906 –0.65 23.6379256 20.191835 12.330754 –0.7 23.1793252 20.20728 12.316628 –0.75 23.7241582 20.208026 12.324215 –0.8 24.0573294 20.205218 12.343919 Monitor Spectrum Trace File Content The following file example shows the Trace file content in Excel.

  • Page 552: Limit

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save 29749009.9 10.21771213 29750009.9 9.474250519 29751009.9 8.374183381 29752009.9 6.909049714 29753009.9 4.86714145 29754009.9 2.253837311 29755009.9 –0.937874114 29756009.9 –4.154472625 Limit Pressing this key selects Limit Lines as the data type to be exported. Pressing the key a second time brings up the Limit Menu that allows you to select which Limit Line to save.

  • Page 553: Csv File Format

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save limit files contained in the EMI measurement guide, HP E7415A. .csv file format Except for information in quotes, limit line files are not case sensitive. Information in bold is required verbatim; other text is example text, and italic text is commentary which should not be present in the file. The first five lines are system-required header lines, and must be in the correct order.

  • Page 554: Lim File Format

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save .lim file format This is a legacy format which allows files saved from older analyzers to be loaded into the X-Series.  Design of files in this format is not recommended. Signal List Pressing this key selects Signal List as the data type to be exported with a save request.  The next step is to select the Save As key in the Save Data menu.

  • Page 555: Scan Table

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save SIG,MRK,TRC,FREQ,PEAK AMPL,QPD AMPL,EAVG AMPL,PEAK LL1 DELTA,QPD LL1 DELTA,EAVG LL1 DELTA,RBW,RBW TYPE,TIMESTAMP,USE ANTENNA UNIT 1,False,0,200000000,21.8061675469286,16.2303531188485,8.41938906470973,–35.1935324964316,– 40.7693469245116,–48.5803109786505,120000,CISPR,2013/03/14 14:41:56,False 2,False,0,300000000,21.3482238148031,16.1882461755239,8.36820889147891,–35.651476228557,– 40.8114538678362,–48.6314911518813,120000,CISPR,2013/03/14 14:42:00,False 3,False,0,450000000,22.1630365302133,16.9299290135531,9.05807786531506,–34.8366635131469,– 40.0697710298071,–47.9416221780451,120000,CISPR,2013/03/14 14:42:04,False 4,False,1,771510577.7557838,23.3461676746558,17.551852007441,9.67230424390617,–33.6535323687044,– 39.4478480359192,–47.327395799454,120000,CISPR,2013/03/14 14:42:08,False Scan Table Selects Signal List as the data type to be exported with a save request.  The next step is to select the Save As key in the Save Data menu.
  • Page 556 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save • Int Preamp Band • Int Preamp State • Log Percentage • Meas Time • Meas Time Mode • Point/RBW • RBW • RBW Mode • RF Input • Scan Points • Scan Points Mode •...

  • Page 557: Meas Results

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Dwell Time,0.00410213333333333,0.000108066666666717,6.73333333333333E–06,6.73333333336191E– 06,6.73333333335395E–06,1.26666666667647E–06,0.001,0.001,0.001,0.001 Dwell Time Mode,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO Step Size,100,4499.5477841423,60000,60003.4287673581,60002.4743288383,500000,100000,100000,100000,100000 Step Size Mode,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO Scan Points,1411,6635,4501,11667,16167,34001,2,2,2,2 Scan Points Mode,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO Scan Time,5.784008,0.716914266667,0.0303,0.078551066667,0.108851066667,0.043066666667,0.001,0.001,0.001,0.001 Scan Time Mode,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO,AUTO Auto Step Size Rules,Points per RBW,Points per RBW,Points per RBW,Points per RBW,Points per RBW,Points per RBW,Points per RBW,Points per RBW,Points per RBW,Points per RBW Pts/RBW,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,2 Log %,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10,10...
  • Page 558 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Header On/Off Enables you to choose whether or not to show Trace Header information in the report. Key Path Save,  Data, Meas Result, Trace Remote Command :MMEMory:RESults:TRACe:HEADer ON|OFF|0|1 :MMEMory:RESults:TRACe:HEADer? Example :MMEM:RES:TRAC:HEAD ON Preset Not part of Preset, but is reset to ON by Restore Mode Defaults; survives Shutdown.
  • Page 559 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Edit Header This key enables you to edit the trace file header information. Key Path Save, Export Data, Meas Result, Trace Initial S/W Revision A.10.00 Title Provides a title of up to 200 characters by which you can easily identify the Trace. The descriptions will be stored in the exported Trace file as a title and can be displayed in the active function area by selecting them as the active function, if desired to be in a screen capture.

  • Page 560: Amplitude Correction Display

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Operator Provides the Operator information of up to 100 characters. The descriptions will be stored in the exported Trace file as an Operator field and can be displayed in the active function area by selecting them as the active function, if desired to be in a screen capture.

  • Page 561: Limits Display State

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Example :MMEM:RES:CORR:MODE DATA Notes OFF= Off DESCription= Description and comment only DATA= Full data Preset Not part of Preset, but is reset to DESCription by Restore Mode Defaults; survives shutdown. State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Off|Description and comment only|Full Data Readback Text...

  • Page 562: Scan Table On/Off

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Off|Flat Color|3D Color Initial S/W Revision A.10.00 Scan Table On/Off Enables you to choose whether or not to show Scan Table information in the report. Key Path Save, Data, Meas Result, Scan Table Remote Command :MMEMory:RESults:SCAN ON|OFF|0|1 :MMEMory:RESults:SCAN?

  • Page 563: Screen Image

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Example :MMEM:RES:OUTP PDF Preset Not part of Preset, but is reset to HTML by Restore Mode Defaults; survives shutdown. State Saved Saved in instrument state Range HTML|PDF Readback Text HTML|PDF Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Save As . . . When you press “Save As”, the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled “Save As.”...
  • Page 564 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save The image to be saved is actually captured when the Save front panel key is pressed, and kept in temporary storage to be used if you ask for a Screen Image save.  When the Screen Image key is pressed, a "thumbnail"...

  • Page 565: Themes

    This is much like the "Flat Color" theme available in X-Series. Also, if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black & white screen image, that would be much like "Flat Monochrome".   In other words, each of the X-Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA/PSA. But they are not identical.

  • Page 566: Flat Monochrome

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Key Path Save, Screen Image, Themes Example MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM FCOL Readback Flat Color Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Flat Monochrome Selects a format that is like Flat Color. But only black is used (no colors, not even gray), and no fill. Key Path Save, Screen Image, Themes Example...

  • Page 567: Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save parameter  indicates the total amount of storage currently used in bytes. The second parameter  indicates the total amount of storage available, also in bytes. The <file_entry> is a string. Each <file_ entry>  indicates the name, type, and size of one file in the directory list: <file_name>,<file_type>,<file_size>...

  • Page 568: Mass Storage Delete   (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save Key path SCPI Only Remote Command :MMEMory:COPY:DEVice <source_string>,<dest_string> Notes The strings must be a valid logical path or a valid device keyword. If the dest_string is a device keyword, the data is copied from the source file to the device. If the source_string is a device keyword, the data is copied to the source file from the device. ...

  • Page 569: Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Save This command will generate an “access denied” error if the new directory would be in a restricted folder (e.g., C:\Windows) and the current user does not have Power User or Administrator privileges. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only) Key path...

  • Page 570: Single

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Single Single Sets the Frequency Scan for single operation. See "Continuous/ Single Scan " on page 573 for more information. If you are already in single scan, pressing Single key has no effect. If a scan sequence is in Scan only and no active scan is running, pressing the Single key starts a new scan. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 571: Source

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Source Source There is no Source control functionality for this measurement. When this key is pressed, the screen either displays a blank menu, or the previously-selected menu remains unchanged. Key Path Front-panel key EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 572: Span X Scale

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement SPAN X Scale SPAN X Scale Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the span parameters. The only function in this menu is Span, which controls the Span of the display. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only.

  • Page 573: Sweep/ Control

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Sweep/ Control Sweep/ Control Displays the menu of keys that enable you to control the sweep parameters. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Continuous/ Single Scan This key determines whether the scan is continuous or single. The scan will not start until you manually initiate the scanning through the ...

  • Page 574: Start/ Stop

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Sweep/ Control Remote Command :INITiate:PAUSe Example INIT:PAUS Couplings When paused, the label on the key changes to “Resume”. Backwards :HOLD Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility The command above is included for ESU compatibility. SCPI Notes Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Key Path Sweep/ Control...

  • Page 575: Clear List And Start

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Sweep/ Control Couplings When stopped, the label on the key changes to Start. Backwards :ABORt Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility This SCPI is remote language compatible with ESU. SCPI Notes Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Clear List and Start This key will perform the following when pressed: 1.

  • Page 576: Continuous (Meters)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Sweep/ Control Remote Command INITiate[1]:CONTinuous OFF Example INIT:CONT 0; INIT:IMM Dependencies This key is grayed out when a scan sequence is running. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...

  • Page 577: System

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement System System "System" on page 272 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 578: Trace/ Detector

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector Trace/ Detector Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the trace setting. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Select Trace Specifies the selected trace. The “selected trace” is the trace that other parameters under the Trace/Detector menu will apply to.

  • Page 579: Max Hold

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector Key Path Trace/Detector Example TRAC:FSC:TYPE AVER Dependencies This key is grayed out when a scan sequence is running except during single range scanning. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent remote command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...

  • Page 580: View/Blank

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector Couplings Affected by # of Scans (Avg Number). Whenever you press Min Hold or send the equivalent remote command, Update is set to On and Display is set to On. Preset After a Preset, any trace that is in Min Hold is cleared (all trace points set to mintracevalue). State Saved Saved in instrument state.

  • Page 581: Trace Update State (Remote Command Only)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector • Background: Update On, Display Off (this allows a trace to be blanked and continue to update “in the background”) Key Path Trace/Detector Notes The four states of this 1-of-N actually set two variables, Update and Display, to their four possible combinations: Trace On: Update and Display both On View: Update Off and Display On...

  • Page 582: Detector (Trace)

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector :TRACe[1]|2|3:FSCan:DISPlay ? Example FSC:TRAC2:DISP  Makes trace 2 visible. FSC:TRAC:DISP  Query display state of trace 1. Notes This function could have been implemented as an On/Off function, but we wanted to preserve the legacy “blank” nomenclature. The remote command is implemented as Display on/off. Couplings Whenever you set Update to On for any trace, the Display is set to On for that trace.

  • Page 583: Peak

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector Average, then for Detector 3, RMS Average is grayed out. If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent remote command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”...

  • Page 584: Emi Average

    EMI Average detection displays the average value of the amplitude envelope, rather than the average value of the sample-detected amplitude.  It is defined for EMI measurements by the CISPR 16–1–1 standard and, in the X-series, uses a sophisticated algorithm to implement a lowpass filter that conforms to the latest CISPR standard.  Key Path...

  • Page 585: Negative Peak

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector Couplings Selecting a detector for a trace (pressing the key or sending a [:SENS]:FSC:DET:TRAC command) puts Update On and Display On for that trace, even if that detector was already selected. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Negative Peak This sets the detector for the currently selected trace to Negative Peak.

  • Page 586: Copy Now

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Copy Now Executes the Copy operation and puts the destination trace in Update=Off, Display=On. Key Path Trace/Detector, Copy/Exchange Remote Command :TRACe:FSCan:COPY TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3, TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3 Example TRAC:FSC:COPY TRACE1, TRACE3 ...

  • Page 587: Query Trace Data

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector Remote Command :TRACe:FSCan[:DATA] TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3, <data> Example TRAC:FSC TRACE1, –1, –2, –3, –4, –5  Sends five points to Trace 1. Assuming that FORMat:DATA is set to ASCII, Y Axis Unit is set to dBm, and sweep points is set to 5, this will result in Trace 1 consisting of the five points –1 dBm, –2 dBm, –3 dBm, –4 dBm, and –5 dBm.

  • Page 588: Backwards Compatibility Scpi Commands

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector n* 4 bytes measurement results of trace 2 if trace 2 update is true; else return 0 n* 4 bytes measurement results of trace 3 if trace 3 update is true; else return 0 Backwards :TRACe[:DATA]? Compatibility SCPI...
  • Page 589 8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trace/ Detector [:SENSe]:DETector[1]|2|3[:FUNCtion] ? Example DET3 APE  Set trace 3 to use Peak Detector. Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. This command is alias to [:SENSe]:FSCan:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3 <DectectorTye>.

  • Page 590: Trigger

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trigger Trigger "Trigger" on page 358 Free Run "Free Run " on page 365 Video "Video (IF Envelope) " on page 366 Trigger Level "Trigger Level " on page 366 Trig Slope "Trig Slope " on page 367 Trig Delay "Trig Delay "...

  • Page 591: Trig Delay

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement Trigger Trig Delay "Trig Delay " on page 374 Zero Span Delay Comp "Zero Span Delay Comp On/Off" on page 374 Auto/Holdoff "Auto/Holdoff " on page 375 Auto Trig "Auto Trig " on page 375 Trig Holdoff "Trig Holdoff "...

  • Page 592: User Preset

    Preset without affecting the trace data, limit lines or correction data. In the X-Series, “state” always includes all of this data; so whenever state is loaded, or User Preset is executed, all of the traces, limit lines and corrections are affected.   Although this differs from previous behavior, it is desirable behavior, and should not cause adverse issues for users.

  • Page 593: User Preset All Modes

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement User Preset Key Path User Preset Remote Command :SYSTem:PRESet:USER Example :SYST:PRES:USER:SAVE:SYST:PRES:USER Notes :SYST:PRES:USER:SAVE is used to save the current state as the user preset state. Clears all pending OPC bits. The Status Byte is set to 0. Pressing the User Preset front-panel key while already in the User Preset menu will cause the User Preset to get executed Couplings...

  • Page 594: Save User Preset

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement User Preset Save User Preset Saves the currently active mode and its State. You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST:PRES:USER remote command.  This same state is also saved by the Save State function.

  • Page 595: View/ Display

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement View/ Display View/ Display Displays the menu keys that enable you to select the measurement view. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Display The Display menu is common to most measurements, and is used for configuring items on the display. Some Display menu settings apply to all the measurements in a mode, and some only to the current measurement. ...

  • Page 596: Meas Bar On/Off

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement View/ Display Key Path View/Display, Display Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Meas Bar On/Off This function turns the Measurement Bar on and off, including the settings panel. When off, the graticule area expands to fill the area formerly occupied by the Measurement Bar. Key Path View/Display, Display, Annotation Remote Command...

  • Page 597: Screen

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement View/ Display Screen This controls the display of the annunciation and annotation around the graticule, including any annotation on lines (such as the display line, the threshold line, etc.) and the y-axis annotation. This does NOT include marker annotation (or the N dB result).

  • Page 598: Title

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement View/ Display Key Path View/Display, Display, Annotation Remote Command :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe]? Example DISP:ACT OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to Off. Preset This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings, Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state.

  • Page 599: Clear Title

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement View/ Display Press Change Title to enter a new title through the alpha editor. Press Enter or Return to complete the entry. Press ESC to cancel the entry and preserve your existing title. The display title will replace the measurement name. It remains for this measurement until you press Change Title again, or you recall a state, or a Preset is performed.

  • Page 600: Graticule

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement View/ Display Graticule Pressing Graticule turns the display graticule On or Off. It also turns the graticule y-axis annotation on and off. Key Path View/Display, Display Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]? Example DISP:WIND:TRAC:GRAT:GRID OFF Notes The graticule is the set of horizontal and vertical lines that make up the grid/divisions for the x-axis and y-axis.

  • Page 601: System Display Settings

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement View/ Display Default Unit Depends on the current selected Y axis unit Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 System Display Settings These settings are "Mode Global" – they affect all modes and measurements and are reset only by Restore Misc Defaults or Restore System Defaults under System.
  • Page 602 This is much like the "Flat Color" theme available in X-Series. Also, if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black & white screen image, that would be much like "Flat Monochrome".   In other words, each of the X-Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA/PSA. But they are not identical.

  • Page 603: Backlight

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement View/ Display Flat Monochrome Selects a format that is like Flat Color. But only black is used (no colors, not even gray), and no fill. Key Path Save, Screen Image, Themes Example MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM FMON Readback Flat Mono Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Backlight...

  • Page 604: Meters Freq Line

    8  Frequency Scan Measurement View/ Display display area. Key Path View/ Display Remote Command :DISPlay:FSCan:VIEW:METer[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :DISPlay:FSCan:VIEW:METer[:STATe]? Example :DISP:FSC:VIEW:MET 1 :DISP:FSC:VIEW:MET? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Meters Freq Line When on, a blue vertical line showing the location of the meters frequency will appear on the frequency scan graph.
  • Page 605 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer EMI Receiver Mode Reference 9 Strip Chart Measurement The Strip Chart measurement is an EMI measurement for the X- Series platform that can be used for troubleshooting in CISPR pre- compliance and compliance test.  The Strip Chart measurement is capable of measuring a signal in real time with three EMI detectors simultaneously.
  • Page 606 9  Strip Chart Measurement Measurement Commands for Strip Chart The following commands are used to retrieve the measurement results: Remote Command :MEASure|READ|FETCh:SCHart[1]|2? Example MEAS:SCH? FETCH:SCH? READ:SCH? EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 607 9  Strip Chart Measurement Remote Command Results Command Results Returned INITiate:SCHart CONFigure? name of current measurement: " SCHart " CONFigure:SCHart n/a  (selects Strip Chart measurement in Meas Preset state) INITiate:SCHart n/a (selects Strip Chart measurement without affecting settings) FETCh:SCHart [n]? Not specified Return the following comma-separated scalar results: MEASure:SCHart [n]?

  • Page 608: Amptd  Y Scale

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale AMPTD  Y Scale Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the amplitude parameters. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Reference Level Specifies the amplitude represented by the topmost graticule line. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Remote Command...

  • Page 609: Internal Preamp

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale Internal Preamp This key works the same way in this and many other measurements, so it is documented in the Common Measurement Functions section. For more details on this key, see "Internal Preamp" on page 905 Attenuation Enables you to set the value of the Attenuation parameter.

  • Page 610: Presel Center

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Remote Command :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <rel_ampl> :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision? Example DISP:SCH:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV 5 dB DISP:SCH:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV? Preset 10.00 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 0.10 dB 20.00 dB Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Presel Center When this key is pressed, the centering of the preselector filter is adjusted to optimize the amplitude accuracy at the frequency of the selected marker.

  • Page 611: Proper Preselector Operation

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale If the analyzer s in a measurement such as averaging when centering is initiated, the act of centering the preselector will restart averaging but the first average trace will not be taken until the centering is completed.
  • Page 612 –500 MHz 500 MHz Default Unit Backwards [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MMW:PADJust PSA had multiple preselectors, but the X-Series has only one. These commands simply alias to [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector MWAVe | MMWave | EXTernal...
  • Page 613 9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale The units of current  (A, dBmA, dBuA) are calculated based on 50 ohms input impedance. All four of the EMI units (dBµA/m, dBµV/m, dBG, dBpT) are treated by the instrument exactly as though they were dBuV. ...

  • Page 614: Dbmv

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale Preset dBm for log scale, V for linear. The true ‘preset’ value is dBm, since at preset the Y Scale type is set to logarithmic. State Saved Saved in instrument state Readback line 1-of-N selection Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00...

  • Page 615: Dbµv

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to watt. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW W Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON.  Readback Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00...

  • Page 616: Dbµa

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale Example UNIT:POW DBUV Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON.  Readback dBµV Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 dBµA Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA. The unit dBuA can also appear as an Antenna Unit.

  • Page 617: Antenna Unit

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale Antenna Unit When a Correction is turned on that uses an Antenna Unit, the Y Axis Unit changes to that Antenna Unit. All of the keys in the Y-Axis Unit menu are then greyed out, except the Antenna Unit key. The unit being used is shown on this key and is shown as selected in the submenu.

  • Page 618: Dbpt

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale Example UNIT:POW DBUAM Dependencies Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback dBµA Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 dBpΤ Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBpT. This is an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON.

  • Page 619: Reference Level Offset

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale Reference Level Offset Enables you to add an offset value to the displayed reference level. The reference level is the absolute amplitude represented by the top graticule line on the display. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Remote Command :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_...

  • Page 620: Low Band

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale connected to one of the analyzer’s USB ports, if it is the first time that the SA mode has run since powerup, or if the last time the SA mode was running the USB Preamp was NOT connected. Subsequently disconnecting the USB Preamp from USB does not change the Internal Preamp setting nor restore the previous setting.

  • Page 621: Full Range

    9  Strip Chart Measurement AMPTD  Y Scale :POW:GAIN:BAND LOW Readback Low Band Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Full Range Sets the internal preamp to use its full range. The low band (0–3.6 GHz or 0–3GHz, depending on the model) is supplied by the low band preamp and the frequencies above low band are supplied by the high band preamp.

  • Page 622: Auto Couple

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Auto Couple Auto Couple The Auto Couple feature provides a quick and convenient way to automatically couple multiple instrument settings. This helps ensure accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range. When the Auto Couple feature is activated, either from the front panel or remotely, all parameters of the current measurement that have an Auto/Manual mode are set to Auto mode and all measurement settings dependent on (or coupled to) the Auto/Man parameters are automatically adjusted for optimal performance.
  • Page 623 9  Strip Chart Measurement Auto Couple EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 624 9  Strip Chart Measurement Displays the menu key that enables you to control the resolution BW. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Res BW Activates the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) action function, which allows you to manually set the RBW. Key Path Remote Command [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <freq>...

  • Page 625: Filter Bw

    Dependencies DB3|DB6|IMPulse are not available when the EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL. See error – 221.1100 in Master Error Messages: X-Series document for exact error text. Preset Preset type is based on EMC Standard Preset To key.
  • Page 626 9  Strip Chart Measurement Readback Text The currently selected Filter BW Backwards SENSe1|SENSe2|[SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix 1|2 is irrelevant to the SCPI Notes measurement; they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Initial S/W Revision A.10.00 Remote Command...

  • Page 627: Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)

    (displayed average count reset to 1), but does not restart Max Hold and Min Hold. The X-Series has Single and Cont keys in place of the SweepSingleCont key.  In the X-Series, if in single measurement, the Cont key (and INIT:CONT ON ) switches to continuous measurement, but never restarts a measurement and never resets a sweep.
  • Page 628 9  Strip Chart Measurement Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep) the INIT:CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k = N, at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state.

  • Page 629: File

    9  Strip Chart Measurement File File "File" on page 266 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 630: Freq Channel

    9  Strip Chart Measurement FREQ Channel FREQ Channel Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the frequency parameters and scale type. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Frequency Sets the frequency of Meters in the Frequency Scan measurement. For the Strip Chart measurement, this key will set the frequency for both meters and strip chart.

  • Page 631: Freq/ Step

    9  Strip Chart Measurement FREQ Channel Freq/ Step Changes the step size for the Frequency. Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? Example FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON FREQ:CENT:STEP 500 MHz FREQ:CENT UP increases the current center frequency value by 500 MHz FREQ:CENT:STEP? FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO? Notes...

  • Page 632: Input/Output

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Input/Output Input/Output "Input/Output" on page 150 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 633: Marker

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Marker Marker Accesses the Marker menu. The functions in this menu include a 1-of-N selection of the control mode Normal, Delta or Off for the selected marker. If the selected marker is Off, pressing Marker sets it to Normal and places it at the center of the screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules.

  • Page 634: Marker Y Axis Value ( Remote Command Only )

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Marker Key Path Marker, Select Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X <real> :CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X? Example CALC:SCH:MARK3:X 0 CALC:SCH:MARK3:X? Notes If no suffix is sent, it will use the fundamental units for the current marker X Axis Scale.  If a suffix is sent that does not match the current marker X Axis Scale unit, an “Invalid suffix”...

  • Page 635: Delta

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Marker Key Path Marker Example CALC:SCH:MARK:MODE POS  Sets Marker 1 to Normal. Couplings The marker addressed by this command becomes the selected marker on the front panel. State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Delta Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Delta and turns on the active function for setting its delta...

  • Page 636: Marker Y Axis Value ( Remote Command Only )

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Marker Key Path Marker, Select Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X <real> :CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X? Example CALC:SCH:MARK3:X 0 CALC:SCH:MARK3:X? Notes If no suffix is sent, it will use the fundamental units for the current marker X Axis Scale.  If a suffix is sent that does not match the current marker X Axis Scale unit, an “Invalid suffix”...

  • Page 637: Select Marker

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Marker Select Marker Display a menu with 12 markers available for selection for the current measurement. Key Path Marker Notes Front panel only. The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used Preset Marker 1 State Saved...

  • Page 638: Couple Marker

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Marker Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating. An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number. Couplings The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
  • Page 639 9  Strip Chart Measurement Marker Example :CALC:SCH:MARK:AOFF Couplings Sets the selected marker to 1. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 640: Marker Function

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Marker Function Marker Function Accesses a menu keys that allows you to do marker zoom related function. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Marker Zoom The window will display the strip chart at current selected marker at the center of strip chart with the span of 10% of the previous span of strip chart. ...
  • Page 641 9  Strip Chart Measurement Marker Function Key Path Marker Function Remote Command CALCulate:SCHart:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:ZOOM:CLEar Example CALC:SCH:MARK1:FUNC:ZOOM:CLE Notes You must be in the mode that includes Strip Chart  measurement to use this command. Use INSTrument:SELect to set the mode. Dependencies Marker Zoom Out Full key is not available if Marker Zoom was not executed previously. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 642: Marker To

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Marker To Marker To Displays a menu  that enables you to access the Marker To function. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 MkrΔ->Span Sets the display range to the values of the delta markers. Key Path Marker ->...

  • Page 643: Meas

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas Meas The information in this section is common to all measurements. For key and remote command information for a specific measurement, refer to the section that describes the measurement of interest. Measurements available under the Meas key are specific to the current Mode. When viewing Help for measurements, note the following: Operation for some keys differs between measurements.

  • Page 644: Measurement Group Of Commands

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas Measurement Group of Commands Measure Commands: :MEASure:<measurement>[n]? This is a fast single-command way to make a measurement using the factory default instrument settings. These are the settings and units that conform to the Mode Setup settings (e.g. radio standard) that you have currently selected. •...
  • Page 645 9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas the factory default instrument settings. It does not initiate the taking of measurement data unless INIT:CONTinuous is ON. If you change any measurement settings after using the CONFigure command, the READ command can be used to initiate a measurement without changing the settings back to their defaults.

  • Page 646: Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas measurement and you send READ:ACP? it will initiate a new measurement using the same instrument settings. • Initiates the measurement and puts valid data into the output buffer. If a measurement other than the current one is specified, the instrument will switch to that measurement before it initiates the measurement and returns results.

  • Page 647: Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas Remote Command :CALCulate:DATA[n]? Notes The return trace depends on the measurement. In CALCulate:<meas>:DATA[n], n is any valid subopcode for the current measurement. It returns the same data as the FETCh:<measurement>? query where <measurement> is the current measurement.
  • Page 648 9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas • CFIT or curve fit - applies curve fitting routines to the data. <soffset> and <length> are required to define the data that you want. <roffset> is an optional parameter for the desired order of the curve equation. The query will return the following values: the x-offset (in seconds) and the curve coefficients ((order + 1) values).
  • Page 649 9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas • RMS - returns a single value that is the average power on a root-mean-squared voltage scale (arithmetic rms) of the data point values for the specified region(s) of trace data. See the following equation. For I/Q trace data, the rms of the magnitudes of the I/Q pairs is returned.
  • Page 650 9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas where Xi is a data point value, X is the arithmetic mean of the data point values for the specified region (s), and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s). where |Xi| is the magnitude of an I/Q pair, X is the mean of the magnitudes for the specified region(s), and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s).
  • Page 651 9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas Sample Trace Data - Not Constant Envelope (See below for explanation of variables.) <soffset> - start offset is an optional real number. (It is in seconds for time-domain traces, and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints – 1, for frequency-domain traces). It specifies the amount of data at the beginning of the trace that will be ignored before the decimation process starts.

  • Page 652: Calculate Peaks Of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Returns a list of all the peaks for the currently selected measurement and sub-opcode [n]. The peaks must meet the requirements of the peak threshold and excursion values. n = any valid sub-opcode for the current measurement.

  • Page 653: Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas excursion value stored under the Peak Criteria menu. Values must be provided for threshold and excursion. The sorting and display line parameters are optional (defaults are AMPLitude and ALL). Note that there is always a Y-axis value for the display line, regardless of whether the display line state is on or off.

  • Page 654: Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas The specs for each output type follow: ASCii - Amplitude values are in ASCII, in the current Y Axis Unit, one ASCII character per digit, values separated by commas, each value in the form: SX.YYYYYEsZZ Where: S = sign (+ or -) X = one digit to left of decimal point...

  • Page 655: Meas  Setup

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas  Setup Meas  Setup Displays the menu keys that enable you to setup the measurement. Key Path Front-panel  key Notes Front panel only. State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Analog Demod Tune & Listen The Analog Demod Tune &...

  • Page 656: De-Emphasis (Fm Demod Only)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas  Setup Pressing this key, when it is not selected, selects and activates the FM demodulation function. Pressing it a second time branches to the FM Demod menu where FM demodulation settings can be adjusted. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen Example SCH:DEM FM ...
  • Page 657 9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas  Setup 25 µs Sets the De-emphasis time constant to 25∝µs. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen, FM, De-emphasis Example SCH:DEM:FM:DEEM US25 25 ∝s Readback Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 50 µs Sets the De-emphasis time constant to 50 µs. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen, FM, De-emphasis Example...

  • Page 658: Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Meas  Setup ΦM Pressing this key, when it is not selected, selects and activates the ΦM demodulation function Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Pressing this key, turns the demodulation function off. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Example...

  • Page 659: Mode

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Mode Mode "Mode" on page 222 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 660: Mode Preset

    In the X-Series, the legacy “Factory Preset” has been replaced with Mode Preset, which only presets Notes the currently active mode, not the entire instrument.  In the X-Series, the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System, Restore System Defaults All, which behaves essentially the same way as restore System Defaults does on ESA and PSA.

  • Page 661: How-To Preset

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Mode Preset User Preset. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 How-To Preset The table below shows all possible presets, their corresponding SCPI commands and front-panel access (key paths). Instrument settings depend on the current measurement context. Some settings are local to the current measurement, some are global (common) across all the measurements in the current mode, and some are global to all the available modes.
  • Page 662 9  Strip Chart Measurement Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset :SYSTem:PON:TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset :SYSTem:PON:TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State :SYSTem:PON:TYPE LAST System Menu EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 663: Mode Setup

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup "Mode Setup" on page 246 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 664: Peak Search

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Peak Search Peak Search Displays the Peak Search menu and places the selected marker on the trace point with the maximum y- axis value for that marker’s trace. If the selected marker is off, it is turned on as a normal marker and a peak search is performed.

  • Page 665: Print

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Print Print "Print" on page 271 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 666: Quick Save

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Quick Save Quick Save The Quick Save front-panel key repeats the most recent save that was performed from the Save menu, with the following exceptions: • Register saves are not remembered as Saves for the purpose of the Quick Save function •...
  • Page 667 9  Strip Chart Measurement Quick Save If you enter a file name for a given file type, then the prefix becomes the filename you entered instead of the default prefix, followed by an underscore. The last four letters (the suffix) are the 4-digit number. For example, if you save a measurement results file as “fred.csv”, then the next auto file name chosen for a measurement results save will be fred_0000.csv.

  • Page 668: Recall

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall Recall The recall key accesses the menu that allows you to load a measurement state and data from external files or registers. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 State The Recall State menu lets you choose a register or file from which to recall the state.  The content of a state file includes all of the settings and data required to return the analyzer as closely as possible to the Mode it was in, with the exact settings that were in place, when the save occurred.

  • Page 669: More Information

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall matches, a full recall proceeds by aborting the currently running measurement, clearing any pending operations, and then loading the State from the saved state file. You can open state files from any mode, so recalling a State file switches to the mode that was active when the save occurred. After switching to the mode of the saved state file, mode settings and data (if any for the mode) are loaded with values from the saved file.

  • Page 670: From File

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall You want all traces to load exactly Save State On recall, all traces’ mode and data as they were when saved. will be exactly as they were when saved.  Any traces that were updating willhave their data immediately overwritten.

  • Page 671: Edit Register Names

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths; the Enter key to open a directory; and the Backspace key to go back one directory.

  • Page 672: Register 1 Thru Register 16

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall Key Path Recall, State Mode Dependencies N9060A–7FP or N9060B–2FP license required to edit the register names.  When the feature is not licensed, sending the SCPI command generates an error, –221,"Settings conflict;Option not available" Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 Register 1 thru Register 16 Selecting any one of these register keys causes the State of the mode from the specified Register to be...

  • Page 673: Data (Import)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall modified. In addition, you can use the Edit Register Names key under Save, State to enter custom names for each register. Registers are shared by all modes, so recalling from any one of the registers will cause a mode switch to the mode that was active when the save to the Register occurred.

  • Page 674: Amplitude Correction

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall Notes The menu is built from whatever data types are available for the mode. Some keys will be missing completely, so the key locations in the sub-menu will vary. No SCPI command directly controls the Data Type that this key controls. The Data Type is included in the MMEM:LOAD commands.

  • Page 675: Default Directory

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall Couplings When a correction file is loaded from mass storage, it is automatically turned on (Correction ON) and ApplyCorrections is set to On. This allows you to see its effect, thus confirming the load. Readback selected Correction Backwards :MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection ANTenna | CABLe | OTHer | USER, <filename>...

  • Page 676: Open

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall myTrace2.csv in the current path. The default path is My Documents\EMI\data\xxx\traces where xxx is the measurement name. Dependencies A trace cannot be recalled from a trace file that was exported with ALL traces selected. A trace cannot be imported if the number of trace points in the file do not match the number of sweep points currently set for the measurement. ...

  • Page 677: Trace

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall Default Directory Specifies the default directory used for loading of Amplitude Correction. If user is selected, the default recall directory is the default (My Documents\amplitudeCorrections) or the last directory you saved the amplitude correction data to.  Otherwise, the default recall directory is My Documents\EMC Limits and Ampcor\Ampcor, which contains a set of preloaded amplitude correction files in the directory called Ampcor. ...

  • Page 678: Limit

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall Readback 1|2|3 Status Bits/OPC Sequential - aborts the current measurement. dependencies Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Limit This key selects Limit Lines as the data type to be imported.  When pressed a second time, it brings up the Limits Menu, which lets you select into which Limit the data will be imported.

  • Page 679: Open

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Recall State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range User| Preloaded Readback “User”| “Preloaded” Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Open Most of the functions under this key work the same way in many measurements. For details about this key, "Open…"...

  • Page 680: Restart

    (displayed average count reset to 1) for a trace in Clear Write, but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold. In the X-Series, the Restart hardkey and the INITiate:RESTart command restart not only Trace Average, but MaxHold and MinHold traces as well.
  • Page 681 9  Strip Chart Measurement Restart Even when set for Single operation, multiple sweeps may be taken when Restart is pressed (for example, when averaging/holding is on). Thus when we say that Restart "restarts a measurement," we may mean: • It restarts the current sweep •...

  • Page 682: Save

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save Save The Save menu lets you choose what you want to save and where you want to save it. Among the types of files you can save are States, Traces, and Screen Images. In addition, an Export (Data) option lets you save a number of data types as CSV files for easy import into Excel and other spreadsheet programs.
  • Page 683 9  Strip Chart Measurement Save update. After saving to a file, the analyzer automatically returns to the previous menu and any Save As dialog goes away. Backwards :MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<filename> Compatibility SCPI For backwards compatibility, the above syntax is supported.  The "1" is simply ignored. The command is sequential.
  • Page 684 9  Strip Chart Measurement Save File/Folder List Enables you to navigate to the center of the dialog that contains the list of files and folders. Once here you can get information about the file and use the tab keys to navigate to the other fields in the dialog, such as Save In.

  • Page 685: Edit Register Names

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save Key Path Save, State Mode Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a State Save Type Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys, to help you remember what you are using that state to save.

  • Page 686: Register 1 Thru Register 16

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save If you try to edit the name of an empty register, the analyzer will first save the state to have a file to put the name in. If you load a named state file into an analyzer with older firmware it will ignore the metadata. The *SAV and *RCL commands will not be affected by the custom register names, nor will the MMEM commands. ...
  • Page 687 9  Strip Chart Measurement Save There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument, not one set for each Mode. When a state is saved, the Mode it was saved from is saved with it; then when it is recalled, the instrument switches to that Mode. After the save completes, the corresponding register menu key annotation is updated with the date and time and the message "Register <register number>...

  • Page 688: Data (Export)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save Data (Export) Exporting a data file stores data from the current measurement to mass storage files. The Export Menu only contains data types that are supported by the current measurement. Since the commonly exported data files are in .csv format, the data can be edited by you  prior to importing. This allows youto export a data file, manipulate the data in Excel (the most common PC Application for manipulating .csv files) and then import it.

  • Page 689: Correction Data File

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save Dependencies Corrections are not supported by all Measurements. If in a Mode in which some Measurements support it, this key will be grayed out in measurements that do not. The key will not show at all if no measurements in the Mode support it.
  • Page 690 9  Strip Chart Measurement Save Line Type of field Example Notes Freq Interpolation Frequency Interpolation,Linear if omitted leaves the Freq Interpolation unchanged.   Allowable values:  Linear, Logarithmic Bias value in mA Bias,0.00 If omitted leaves the Bias value unchanged (added as of A.08.50) Bias State Bias State,On If omitted leaves the Bias State...

  • Page 691: Trace

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save • 17 dB at 210 MHz • 14.8 dB at 225 MHz Then the file will look like: • Amplitude Correction • "Correction Factors for 11966E" • "Class B Radiated" • A.02.06,N9020A • P13 EA3 UK6,01 • Frequency Unit,MHz •...

  • Page 692: Frequency Scan Trace File Content

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save Using the C: drive is strongly discouraged, since it runs the risk of being overwritten during an instrument software upgrade. Both single and double quotes are supported for any filename parameter over SCPI. Dependencies Traces cannot be recalled from a trace file that was saved with ALL traces selected. Readback 1|2|3|All Status Bits/OPC...

  • Page 693: Strip Chart Trace File Content

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save 30540022.27 –90.66836416 30600024.74 –87.10931161 Strip Chart Trace File Content The following file example shows the Trace file content in Excel. AllTrace EMI:SCHart A.07.00_R0009 N9020A 526 EA3 B25 P26 PFR Frequency 600000000 Freq Offset Attenuation Y Axis Unit dBuV Ref Level Offset Internal Preamp State...

  • Page 694: Monitor Spectrum Trace File Content

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save –0.4 23.6549108 20.186032 12.352822 –0.45 23.1558073 20.184001 12.356569 –0.5 23.8378283 20.171481 12.352344 –0.55 24.0481835 20.148553 12.329247 –0.6 23.7659679 20.165786 12.308906 –0.65 23.6379256 20.191835 12.330754 –0.7 23.1793252 20.20728 12.316628 –0.75 23.7241582 20.208026 12.324215 –0.8 24.0573294 20.205218 12.343919 Monitor Spectrum Trace File Content The following file example shows the Trace file content in Excel.

  • Page 695: Screen Image

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save 29749009.9 10.21771213 29750009.9 9.474250519 29751009.9 8.374183381 29752009.9 6.909049714 29753009.9 4.86714145 29754009.9 2.253837311 29755009.9 –0.937874114 29756009.9 –4.154472625 Save As . . . When you press “Save As”, the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled “Save As.” This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse.
  • Page 696 9  Strip Chart Measurement Save Screen Image files contain an exact representation of the analyzer display. They cannot be loaded back onto the analyzer, but they can be loaded into your PC for use in many popular applications. The image to be saved is actually captured when the Save front panel key is pressed, and kept in temporary storage to be used if you ask for a Screen Image save. ...

  • Page 697: Themes

    This is much like the "Flat Color" theme available in X-Series. Also, if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black & white screen image, that would be much like "Flat Monochrome".   In other words, each of the X-Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA/PSA. But they are not identical.

  • Page 698: Flat Monochrome

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save Key Path Save, Screen Image, Themes Example MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM FCOL Readback Flat Color Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Flat Monochrome Selects a format that is like Flat Color. But only black is used (no colors, not even gray), and no fill. Key Path Save, Screen Image, Themes Example...

  • Page 699: Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save parameter  indicates the total amount of storage currently used in bytes. The second parameter  indicates the total amount of storage available, also in bytes. The <file_entry> is a string. Each <file_ entry>  indicates the name, type, and size of one file in the directory list: <file_name>,<file_type>,<file_size>...

  • Page 700: Mass Storage Delete   (Remote Command Only)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save Key path SCPI Only Remote Command :MMEMory:COPY:DEVice <source_string>,<dest_string> Notes The strings must be a valid logical path or a valid device keyword. If the dest_string is a device keyword, the data is copied from the source file to the device. If the source_string is a device keyword, the data is copied to the source file from the device. ...

  • Page 701: Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only)

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Save This command will generate an “access denied” error if the new directory would be in a restricted folder (e.g., C:\Windows) and the current user does not have Power User or Administrator privileges. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only) Key path...

  • Page 702: Single (Single Measurement/Sweep)

    (displayed average count reset to 1), but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold.  In the X-Series, the Single hardkey and the INITiate:IMM command initiate a sweep/ measurement/ average sequence/hold sequence including MaxHold and MinHold.

  • Page 703: Source

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Source Source There is no Source control functionality for this measurement. When this key is pressed, the screen either displays a blank menu, or the previously-selected menu remains unchanged. Key Path Front-panel key EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 704: Span X Scale

    9  Strip Chart Measurement SPAN X Scale SPAN X Scale Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the span x scale parameters. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Ref Value Sets the ref value of the strip chart display.  Key Path SPAN X Scale Remote Command...

  • Page 705: Strip Chart Max Duration

    9  Strip Chart Measurement SPAN X Scale 20 ms 7200 s Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Strip Chart Max Duration Sets the maximum duration for strip chart to record the data. Key Path SPAN X Scale Remote Command :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:MAX:DURation <time> :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:MAX:DURation? Example DISP:SCH:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:X:MAX:DUR 100 s DISP:SCH:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:X:MAX:DUR?

  • Page 706: Sweep/Control

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Sweep/Control Sweep/Control Accesses a menu that enables you to stop and start the measurement. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Stop / Start Enables you to stop a measurement. When stopped, the label on the key changes to Start. Press the Resume, ...

  • Page 707: System

    9  Strip Chart Measurement System System "System" on page 272 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 708: Trace/Detector

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Trace/Detector Trace/Detector Displays a menu of keys that enable you to control the trace setting. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front-panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Select Trace Specifies the selected trace. The “selected trace” is the trace that other parameters under the Trace/Detector menu will apply to.
  • Page 709 9  Strip Chart Measurement Trace/Detector EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 710: Trigger

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Trigger Trigger "Trigger" on page 358 Free Run "Free Run " on page 365 Video "Video (IF Envelope) " on page 366 Trigger Level "Trigger Level " on page 366 Trig Slope "Trig Slope " on page 367 Trig Delay "Trig Delay "...

  • Page 711: Trig Delay

    9  Strip Chart Measurement Trigger Trig Delay "Trig Delay " on page 374 Zero Span Delay Comp "Zero Span Delay Comp On/Off" on page 374 Auto/Holdoff "Auto/Holdoff " on page 375 Auto Trig "Auto Trig " on page 375 Trig Holdoff "Trig Holdoff "...

  • Page 712: User Preset

    Preset without affecting the trace data, limit lines or correction data. In the X-Series, “state” always includes all of this data; so whenever state is loaded, or User Preset is executed, all of the traces, limit lines and corrections are affected.   Although this differs from previous behavior, it is desirable behavior, and should not cause adverse issues for users.

  • Page 713: User Preset All Modes

    9  Strip Chart Measurement User Preset Key Path User Preset Remote Command :SYSTem:PRESet:USER Example :SYST:PRES:USER:SAVE:SYST:PRES:USER Notes :SYST:PRES:USER:SAVE is used to save the current state as the user preset state. Clears all pending OPC bits. The Status Byte is set to 0. Pressing the User Preset front-panel key while already in the User Preset menu will cause the User Preset to get executed Couplings...

  • Page 714: Save User Preset

    9  Strip Chart Measurement User Preset Save User Preset Saves the currently active mode and its State. You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST:PRES:USER remote command.  This same state is also saved by the Save State function.

  • Page 715: View/Display

    9  Strip Chart Measurement View/Display View/Display Opens the Display and View menus. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Display The Display menu is common to most measurements, and is used for configuring items on the display. Some Display menu settings apply to all the measurements in a mode, and some only to the current measurement. ...

  • Page 716: Meas Bar On/Off

    9  Strip Chart Measurement View/Display Key Path View/Display, Display Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Meas Bar On/Off This function turns the Measurement Bar on and off, including the settings panel. When off, the graticule area expands to fill the area formerly occupied by the Measurement Bar. Key Path View/Display, Display, Annotation Remote Command...

  • Page 717: Screen

    9  Strip Chart Measurement View/Display Screen This controls the display of the annunciation and annotation around the graticule, including any annotation on lines (such as the display line, the threshold line, etc.) and the y-axis annotation. This does NOT include marker annotation (or the N dB result).

  • Page 718: Title

    9  Strip Chart Measurement View/Display Key Path View/Display, Display, Annotation Remote Command :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe]? Example DISP:ACT OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to Off. Preset This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings, Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state.

  • Page 719: Clear Title

    9  Strip Chart Measurement View/Display Press Change Title to enter a new title through the alpha editor. Press Enter or Return to complete the entry. Press ESC to cancel the entry and preserve your existing title. The display title will replace the measurement name. It remains for this measurement until you press Change Title again, or you recall a state, or a Preset is performed.

  • Page 720: Graticule

    9  Strip Chart Measurement View/Display Graticule Pressing Graticule turns the display graticule On or Off. It also turns the graticule y-axis annotation on and off. Key Path View/Display, Display Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]? Example DISP:WIND:TRAC:GRAT:GRID OFF Notes The graticule is the set of horizontal and vertical lines that make up the grid/divisions for the x-axis and y-axis.

  • Page 721: Themes

    This is much like the "Flat Color" theme available in X-Series. Also, if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black & white screen image, that would be much like "Flat Monochrome".   In other words, each of the X-Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA/PSA. But they are not identical.

  • Page 722: Backlight

    9  Strip Chart Measurement View/Display Flat Color Selects a format that is best when the screen is to be printed on an ink printer. Key Path Save, Screen Image, Themes Example MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM FCOL Readback Flat Color Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Flat Monochrome Selects a format that is like Flat Color.

  • Page 723: Expand Meters

    9  Strip Chart Measurement View/Display Preset 100 (Set by Restore Misc Defaults) Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Expand Meters Enables you to enlarge annotation/indicator of meters graph display. Key Path View/ Display Remote Command :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW:EXPand:METer[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :DISPlay:SCHart:VIEW:EXPand:METer[:STATe]? Example :DISP:SCH:VIEW:EXP:MET 1 :DISP:SCH:VIEW:EXP:MET? Preset State Saved...
  • Page 724 9  Strip Chart Measurement View/Display EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 725 10 Monitor Spectrum Measurement The Monitor Spectrum measurement is an EMI measurement for the X-Series platform that can be used for troubleshooting in pre- compliance and compliance tests. The Monitor Spectrum measurement is capable of measuring a signal and displaying both an RF Spectrum and three EMI detectors simultaneously.
  • Page 726 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Measurement Commands for Monitor Spectrum INITiate:MONitor CONFigure:MONitor CONFigure? MEASure:MONitor[n]? READ:MONitor[n]? FETCh:MONitor[n]? EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 727 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Remote Command Results for Monitor Spectrum Measurement Command Results Returned INITiate:MONitor CONFigure? name of current measurement: " MON" CONFigure:MONitor n/a  (selects Monitor Spectrum measurement in Meas Preset state) INITiate:MONitor n/a (selects Monitor Spectrum measurement without affecting settings) FETCh:MONitor [n]? Return the following comma-separated scalar results: specified...
  • Page 728 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Dependencies In Monitor Spectrum, there are five parameters with some interdependencies (limits and couplings).  The diagram below shows the interdependencies: These dependencies are detailed in the key descriptions for Spectrum RBW and Span. The measurement time is determined by the Span as shown in the table below and is annotated in the lower right corner of the Spectrum display. ...
  • Page 729 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meters Spectrum Span  1 MHz 100 kHz 10 MHz 120 kHz 100 kHz 10 MHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 10 MHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 2 MHz 9 kHz 10 kHz 1 MHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 200 kHz 200 Hz 100 Hz...

  • Page 730: Amptd Y Scale

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale AMPTD Y Scale Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the amplitude parameters. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Reference Level Specifies the amplitude represented by the topmost graticule line. Key Path AMPTD/Y Scale Remote Command...

  • Page 731: Scale/ Div

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Example POW:ATT 10 POW:ATT? Preset 10 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state. 0 dB 50 dB (CXA) 60 dB (EXA) 70 dB (MXA, PXA& N9038A) Default Unit Backwards :INPut[1]|2:ATTenuation Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility This command above is included for ESU compatibility.

  • Page 732: Proper Preselector Operation

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale The value displayed on the Presel Adjust key will change to reflect the new preselector tuning (see Presel Adjust. A number of considerations should be observed to ensure proper operation. See "Proper Preselector Operation" on page 732.

  • Page 733: Preselector Adjust

    –500 MHz 500 MHz Default Unit Backwards [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MMW:PADJust PSA had multiple preselectors, but the X-Series has only one. These commands simply alias to [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.03.00 Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector MWAVe | MMWave | EXTernal...
  • Page 734 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector? Notes PSA had multiple preselectors, and you could select which preselector to adjust. Since the X-Series has only one mm/uW preselector, the preselector selection softkey is no longer available. However,  to provide backward compatibility, we accept the legacy remote commands.

  • Page 735: Dbmv

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale This sets the top line to 10 dBm with each vertical division representing 1 dB. Thus, if a point on trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top, it represents 5 dBm and will read out remotely as 5. Example 2, set the following: Scale Type (Lin) Y Axis Unit, Volts...

  • Page 736: Dbma

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON.  Readback dBmV Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Modified at S/W Revision A.02.00 dBmA Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBmA. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example...

  • Page 737: Dbµv

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to Ampere. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW A Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON.  Readback Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00...

  • Page 738: Dbpw

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale dBpW Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBpW. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit Example UNIT:POW DBPW Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON.  Readback dBµA Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 739: Dbµa

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Example UNIT:POW DBUAM Dependencies Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback dBµA/m Initial S/W Revision A.02.00 dBµA Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA. This is an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON.

  • Page 740: None

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale None This is selected if no Antenna Unit is currently on, however you cannot actually set this value, since it is always grayed out.  The key is included simply to provide an indication on the Readback line of the Antenna Unit key when there is no Antenna Unit selected.
  • Page 741 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]? Dependencies Preamp is not available on all hardware platforms. If the preamp is not present or is unlicensed, the key is not shown. The preamp is not available when the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled. Couplings The act of connecting the U7227A USB Preamplifier to one of the analyzer’s USB ports will cause the Internal Preamp to be switched on.

  • Page 742: Low Band

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Example :POW:GAIN OFF Readback Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Low Band Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band. The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Low Band key label.
  • Page 743 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale The instrument takes the preamp gain into account as it sweeps. If you sweep outside of the range of the preamp the instrument will also account for that. The displayed result will always reflect the correct gain. For some measurements, when the preamp is on and any part of the displayed frequency range is below the lowest frequency for which the preamp has specifications, a warning condition message appears in the status line. ...

  • Page 744: Internal Preamp State (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Internal Preamp State (Remote Command Only) This command is used to set the Internal Preamp state of meters display. Remote Command :INPut[1]|2:GAIN[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :INPut[1]|2:GAIN[:STATe]? Example INP:GAIN OFF INP:GAIN? Notes This command is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility.

  • Page 745: Grid Top Level (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Grid Top Level (Remote Command Only) This command defines the top grid level in the current unit for the spectrum display. This command is different from Reference level where it will adjust the scale per division based on the value set for the bottom grid level.

  • Page 746: Auto Couple

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Auto Couple Auto Couple The Auto Couple feature provides a quick and convenient way to automatically couple multiple instrument settings. This helps ensure accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range. When the Auto Couple feature is activated, either from the front panel or remotely, all parameters of the current measurement that have an Auto/Manual mode are set to Auto mode and all measurement settings dependent on (or coupled to) the Auto/Man parameters are automatically adjusted for optimal performance.
  • Page 747 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Auto Couple EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 748: Rbw (Meters)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the BW parameters. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 RBW (Meters) Activates the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) action function, which allows you to manually set the RBW. For the Monitor Spectrum measurement, this key only affects the RBWs used for meters.

  • Page 749: Rbw (Spectrum)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement 120 kHz (CF - Band C and D, 30 MHz to 1 GHz). 1 MHz (CF - Band E, 1 GHz to 18 GHz) When MIL is in use, RBW (Meters) in Auto is: 10 Hz (CF - less than 1 kHz) 100 Hz (CF –...
  • Page 750 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement 10 MHz 10 kHz – 100 kHz 5 MHz 10 kHz – 100 kHz 2 MHz 1 kHz – 10 kHz 1 MHz 1 kHz – 10 kHz 500 kHz 300 Hz – 3 kHz 200 kHz 100 Hz –...

  • Page 751: Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)

    (displayed average count reset to 1), but does not restart Max Hold and Min Hold. The X-Series has Single and Cont keys in place of the SweepSingleCont key.  In the X-Series, if in single measurement, the Cont key (and INIT:CONT ON ) switches to continuous measurement, but never restarts a measurement and never resets a sweep.
  • Page 752 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep) the INIT:CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k = N, at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state.

  • Page 753: File

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement File File "File" on page 266 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 754: Freq Channel

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement FREQ Channel FREQ Channel Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the frequency parameters and scale type. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Frequency Sets the frequency of Meters in the Frequency Scan measurement. For the Strip Chart measurement, this key will set the frequency for both meters and strip chart.

  • Page 755: Cf À Signal (Replace)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement FREQ Channel Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? Example FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON FREQ:CENT:STEP 500 MHz FREQ:CENT UP increases the current center frequency value by 500 MHz FREQ:CENT:STEP? FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO? Notes Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 508, 513, 526) Preset Auto State Saved...
  • Page 756 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement FREQ Channel values are undefined until the next scan/final measurement. Key Path Freq Remote Command :CALCulate:MONitor:SLISt:APPend:METer Example CALC:MON:SLIS:APP:MET Notes If there is no free space in the signal list, you will be prompted by a message that asks  whether to continue or not: WARNING! There is not enough free space in Signal List.

  • Page 757: Input/Output

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Input/Output Input/Output "Input/Output" on page 150 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 758: Marker

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker Marker Access the Marker menu. The functions in this menu include a 1-of-N selection of the control mode Normal, Delta or Off for the selected marker. If the selected marker is Off, pressing Marker sets it to Normal and places it at the center of the screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules.

  • Page 759: Delta

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker A Normal mode (POSition type) marker can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis value. Its absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value. Key Path Marker Example...

  • Page 760: Select Marker

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker Select Marker Display a menu with 12 markers available for selection for the current measurement. Key Path Marker Notes Front panel only. The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used Preset Marker 1 State Saved...

  • Page 761: Couple Marker

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker 2 – Trace 2 3 – Trace 3 4 – Freq Scan Trace 1 5 – Freq Scan Trace 2 6 – Freq Scan Trace 3 Couplings The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key. If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker.

  • Page 762: Normal Marker State (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker Normal Marker State (Remote Command Only) Toggles the  Normal marker state on and off. Remote Command :CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4[:STATe]? Example CALC:MARK4 ON  Turn on maker 4 in Normal mode.  Notes This SCPI is Meas Local and Context Sensitive. This SCPI alias to :CALC:MON:MARK[1]|2|3|4:MODE POS.

  • Page 763: Delta Marker X Axis Value (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker Notes This SCPI is Meas Local and Context Sensitive. This SCPI alias to :CALC:MON:MARK[1]|2|3|4:MODE DELT. Preset Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Delta Marker X Axis Value (Remote Command Only) Sets the selected marker to Delta mode, and sets/ gets the marker X Axis Values. The command input is in relative values and refers to the reference marker while the query always returns absolute values in order to make it compatible with ESU.

  • Page 764: Marker Y Axis Value ( Remote Command Only )

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker Example CALC:MON:MARK3:X 0 CALC:MON:MARK3:X? Notes If no suffix is sent, it will use the fundamental units for the current marker X Axis Scale.  If a suffix is sent that does not match the current marker X Axis Scale unit, an “Invalid suffix” error will be generated. ...

  • Page 765: Marker Function

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker Function  Marker Function  There is no Marker Function functionality in this measurement. If this key is pressed, it brings up a blank menu. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 766: Marker

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Marker-> Marker-> Displays a menu  that enables you to access the Marker To function. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Mkr->CF Sets the Center Freq to the current value of the selected Marker. Key Path Marker ->...

  • Page 767: Meas

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Meas The information in this section is common to all measurements. For key and remote command information for a specific measurement, refer to the section that describes the measurement of interest. Measurements available under the Meas key are specific to the current Mode. When viewing Help for measurements, note the following: Operation for some keys differs between measurements.

  • Page 768: Measurement Group Of Commands

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Measurement Group of Commands Measure Commands: :MEASure:<measurement>[n]? This is a fast single-command way to make a measurement using the factory default instrument settings. These are the settings and units that conform to the Mode Setup settings (e.g. radio standard) that you have currently selected. •...
  • Page 769 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas the factory default instrument settings. It does not initiate the taking of measurement data unless INIT:CONTinuous is ON. If you change any measurement settings after using the CONFigure command, the READ command can be used to initiate a measurement without changing the settings back to their defaults.

  • Page 770: Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas measurement and you send READ:ACP? it will initiate a new measurement using the same instrument settings. • Initiates the measurement and puts valid data into the output buffer. If a measurement other than the current one is specified, the instrument will switch to that measurement before it initiates the measurement and returns results.

  • Page 771: Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Remote Command :CALCulate:DATA[n]? Notes The return trace depends on the measurement. In CALCulate:<meas>:DATA[n], n is any valid subopcode for the current measurement. It returns the same data as the FETCh:<measurement>? query where <measurement> is the current measurement.
  • Page 772 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas • CFIT or curve fit - applies curve fitting routines to the data. <soffset> and <length> are required to define the data that you want. <roffset> is an optional parameter for the desired order of the curve equation. The query will return the following values: the x-offset (in seconds) and the curve coefficients ((order + 1) values).
  • Page 773 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas • RMS - returns a single value that is the average power on a root-mean-squared voltage scale (arithmetic rms) of the data point values for the specified region(s) of trace data. See the following equation. For I/Q trace data, the rms of the magnitudes of the I/Q pairs is returned.
  • Page 774 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas where Xi is a data point value, X is the arithmetic mean of the data point values for the specified region (s), and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s). where |Xi| is the magnitude of an I/Q pair, X is the mean of the magnitudes for the specified region(s), and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s).
  • Page 775 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Sample Trace Data - Not Constant Envelope (See below for explanation of variables.) <soffset> - start offset is an optional real number. (It is in seconds for time-domain traces, and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints – 1, for frequency-domain traces). It specifies the amount of data at the beginning of the trace that will be ignored before the decimation process starts.

  • Page 776: Calculate Peaks Of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Returns a list of all the peaks for the currently selected measurement and sub-opcode [n]. The peaks must meet the requirements of the peak threshold and excursion values. n = any valid sub-opcode for the current measurement.

  • Page 777: Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas excursion value stored under the Peak Criteria menu. Values must be provided for threshold and excursion. The sorting and display line parameters are optional (defaults are AMPLitude and ALL). Note that there is always a Y-axis value for the display line, regardless of whether the display line state is on or off.

  • Page 778: Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas The specs for each output type follow: ASCii - Amplitude values are in ASCII, in the current Y Axis Unit, one ASCII character per digit, values separated by commas, each value in the form: SX.YYYYYEsZZ Where: S = sign (+ or -) X = one digit to left of decimal point...

  • Page 779: Meas Setup

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Meas Setup Displays the menu keys that enable you to setup the measurement. Key Path Front-panel  key Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Select Signal Specifies the selected signal. The term “Selected signal” is used throughout this document to specify which signal will be affected by the functions.

  • Page 780: Navigate

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Couplings When the signal list is cleared, this value will reset to 0. Preset If the signal list is empty, =0 If the signal list is not empty, = number of peaks in signal list table State Saved Saved in instrument state Number of peaks in the signal list table.

  • Page 781: Scroll Right

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Navigate Notes Front panel only. Dependencies Scroll Right Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Scroll Right Scroll the signal list to the right. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Navigate Notes Front panel only.

  • Page 782: Mark Signal

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Mark Signals Notes Front panel only. Dependencies Couplings When the signal list is cleared, this value will reset to 0. Preset If the signal list is empty, =0 If the signal list is not empty, = number of peaks in signal list table State Saved Saved in instrument state...

  • Page 783: Clear Mark

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Upper Marks duplicate signals with higher amplitude. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Mark Signals, Mark Duplicates Remote Command :CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:DUPLicates:UPPer Example CALC:SLIS:MARK:DUPL:UPP Notes If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Lower...

  • Page 784: Clear All

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Clear All Clears all the marks from the signal list. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Mark Signals Remote Command :CALCulate:SLISt:MARK:CLEar:ALL Example CALC:SLIS:MARK:CLE:ALL  Clear mark from all signals. Notes If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Delete Signals...

  • Page 785: Delete All

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Delete Signals Remote Command :CALCulate:SLISt:DELete:SIGNal <integer> Example CALC:SLIS:DEL:SIGN 4  Delete signal #4. Notes If the signal list contains no data, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed. When signals in the signal list were successfully deleted, an advisory is generated.

  • Page 786: Delete Unmarked

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Delete Unmarked Deletes all unmarked signals in the signal list. If you accessed  this function from the front panel, the following message will prompt you  for confirmation to delete the selected signals from the signal list. This will delete the unmarked signals.

  • Page 787: By Detector Amptd

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Example CALC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE FREQ Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 By Detector Amptd Specifies that the elements in the signal list will be sorted based on the detector amplitude. Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Sort Signals Example CALC:SLIS:SORT:TYPE DAMP Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 788: Sort Order

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Sort Signals, By ∆ Remote Command :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:DLDelta DET1|DET2|DET3 :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:DLDelta? Example CALC:SLIS:SORT:DLD DET2 CALC:SLIS:SORT:DLD? Dependencies Selecting the ∆ Detector type to be sorted (pressing the key or sending the equivalent SCPI command) will turn on the Auto Sort state, even if that ∆...

  • Page 789: Comment

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Signal List, Sort Signals Remote Command :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:AUTO ON|OFF|1|0 :CALCulate:SLISt:SORT:AUTO? Example CALC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO 1  Turn on auto sorting CALC:SLIS:SORT:AUTO? Notes If Scan Sequence is set to Remeasure, signal in the list will only be auto sorted when Remeasure is completed.

  • Page 790: Limit On/Off

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Limits Notes Front panel only. The selected limit is remembered even when not in the Limit Menu. Preset Limit 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Limit On/Off Selects whether the limit and margin are displayed.

  • Page 791: Properties

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Range On|Off Backwards :CALCulate[1]|2:LIMit[1]|2|...|6:STATe Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the SCPI Notes measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Properties...

  • Page 792: Interpolation

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Couplings This matters when testing a trace or limit line for failure, via :CALC:MON:LLIN3:FAIL? or :CALC:MON:TRAC2:FAIL? Preset 1|1|2|2|3|3 State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 1|2|3 Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Interpolation Accesses a menu that lets you set the frequency and amplitude interpolation of the selected limit. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Properties Readback...

  • Page 793: Fixed/ Relative

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup The Interpolation modes determine how limit values are computed between points in the limit table. The appearance of a limit trace is also affected by the amplitude scale, which may be linear or logarithmic. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Properties, Interpolation Remote Command...
  • Page 794 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup [Rel to CF + RL] – if both Relative to CF and RL set to ON. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Relative to CF Chooses whether the limit line frequency points are coupled to the instrument center frequency, and whether the frequency points are expressed as an offset from the instrument center frequency.

  • Page 795: Description

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup It is possible to change this setting after a limit line has been entered. When changing from On to Off or vice-versa, the amplitude values in the limit line table change so that the limit line remains in the same position for the current reference level settings of the instrument.

  • Page 796: Margin

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Example CALC:LLIN:COMM "European Emissions" Preset “” (null String), not affected by Mode Preset, preset by Restore Mode Defaults. State Saved Saved in instrument state Backwards :CALCulate[1]|2:LIMit[1]|2|...|6:COMMent Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility This command above is included for ESU compatibility. The suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the SCPI Notes measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility.

  • Page 797: Edit Limit

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Edit Limit Opens the Table Editor for the selected limit line. Key Path Meas Setup Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Navigate Lets you move through the table to edit the desired point Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Edit Notes There is no value readback on the key 2000...

  • Page 798: Delete Point

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup row is displayed in light gray. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Edit Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Delete Point This is an immediate action key.  It will immediately delete the currently selected point, whether or not that point is being edited, and selects Navigate. ...

  • Page 799: Offset

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Edit Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:BUILd TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3 Example CALC:LLIN2:BUIL TRACE1 Builds limit line 2 based on the data in trace 1. This will overwrite the data in the table editor. Notes Auto return to Edit menu.

  • Page 800: Scale X Axis

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Remote Command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:OFFSet:Y <rel_ampl> :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|...|6:OFFSet:Y? Example CALC:LLIN:OFFS:Y –3 dB  Sets the Y axis offset to –3 dB. CALC:LLIN:OFFS:UPD  Applies the Y axis offset to all points in the limit line, then reset the Y axis offset to zero.

  • Page 801: Test Limits (All Limits)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Test Limits (All Limits) Selects whether displayed traces are tested against displayed limits (i.e. those for which Limit On/Off is set to On). For each displayed trace for which a Limit is turned on, a message will be displayed in the upper-left corner of the graticule to notify whether the trace passes or fails the limits.

  • Page 802: Delete All Limits

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup When this key is pressed a prompt is placed on the screen that says “Please press Enter or OK key to delete limit. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The deletion is only performed if you press OK or Enter;...

  • Page 803: Trace Fail? (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup SCPI Notes measurement, they are added solely for remote language compatibility. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Trace Fail? (Remote Command Only) Tests a trace against all associated limit lines. Returns a 0 if the trace is within all limits and margins, a 1 if the trace exceed either the limit or the margin.

  • Page 804: Limit Line Upper (Remote Command Only, Scpi Standard Compatibility)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Example CALC:LLIN:CONT:POIN?  Returns the number of points in the limit line. Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Limit Line Upper (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard compatibility) Defines a list of amplitude values for a given limit line. Changing the number of elements in the list spectrum will automatically turn the limit line off.

  • Page 805: Analog Demod Tune & Listen

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup Analog Demod Tune & Listen The Analog Demod Tune & Listen key opens the Analog Demod menu that contains keys to turn the demod function on and off and select the modulation type. Key Path Meas Setup Remote Command [:SENSe]:MONitor:DEMod AM|FM|OFF...

  • Page 806: De-Emphasis (Fm Demod Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup De-emphasis (FM Demod Only) The De-emphasis setting controls a single-pole filter (6 dB/octave roll off), usually to counter intentional pre-emphasis in the transmitter. When De-emphasis state is OFF the hardware digital filter is bypassed, otherwise the setting is applied.

  • Page 807: Meas Preset

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Meas Setup 50 ∝s Readback Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 75 µs Sets the De-emphasis time constant to 75 µs. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen, FM, De-emphasis Example MON:DEM:FM:DEEM US75 75 ∝s Readback Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 750 µs Sets the De-emphasis time constant to 750 µsec.

  • Page 808: Mode

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Mode Mode "Mode" on page 222 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 809: Mode Preset

    In the X-Series, the legacy “Factory Preset” has been replaced with Mode Preset, which only presets Notes the currently active mode, not the entire instrument.  In the X-Series, the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System, Restore System Defaults All, which behaves essentially the same way as restore System Defaults does on ESA and PSA.

  • Page 810: How-To Preset

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Mode Preset User Preset. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 How-To Preset The table below shows all possible presets, their corresponding SCPI commands and front-panel access (key paths). Instrument settings depend on the current measurement context. Some settings are local to the current measurement, some are global (common) across all the measurements in the current mode, and some are global to all the available modes.
  • Page 811 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset :SYSTem:PON:TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset :SYSTem:PON:TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State :SYSTem:PON:TYPE LAST System Menu EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 812: Mode Setup

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup "Mode Setup" on page 246 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 813: Peak Search

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Peak Search Peak Search Accesses a menu of Peak Search functions and performs a peak search. If no peak is found, an error is generated and this function cannot be performed. Key Path Front-panel key Remote Command :CALCulate:MONitor:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:MAXimum Example CALC:MON:MARK2:MAX ...

  • Page 814: Next Peak Left

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Peak Search Next Peak Left Moves the selected marker to the nearest peak to the left of the current marker that meets all enabled peak criteria. If there is no valid peak to the left of the current marker position, an error is generated and the marker is not moved.

  • Page 815: Peak Search Criteria

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Peak Search Peak Search Criteria This menu lets you decide the mode of Peak Search. When Highest Peak is selected, pressing Peak Search finds the highest peak on the marker’s trace. If Same as “Next Peak” Criteria is selected, then the search is also forced to consider the Excursion and Threshold found under the “Next Peak”...

  • Page 816: Next Peak Criteria

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Peak Search Next Peak Criteria This key opens a menu that allows you to independently set the Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold and turn them on and off. Key Path Peak Search, Peak Criteria Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Pk Excursion On/Off Turns the peak excursion requirement on/off and sets the excursion value.

  • Page 817: Pk Threshold On/Off

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Peak Search Pk Threshold On/Off Turns the peak threshold requirement on/off and sets the threshold value. The peak threshold value defines the minimum signal level (or min threshold) that the peak identification algorithm uses to recognize a peak.

  • Page 818: Mkr->Cf

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Peak Search Mkr->CF Assigns the selected marker’s frequency to the Center Frequency setting. This is the same as the Mkr -> CF key in the Mkr -> menu.  The key is duplicated here in the Peak Search Menu to allow you to conveniently perform a peak search and marker to CF without having to access two separate menus.

  • Page 819: Next Peak Right (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Peak Search Next Peak Right (Remote Command Only) Performs a Next Peak Right with the specified marker. Remote Command :CALCulate[1]|2:MARKer[1]|2|...|4:MAXimum:RIGHt Example :CALC:MARK4:MAX:RIGH  Performs a Next Peak Right with Marker 4.  Backwards Compatibility Aliased to :CALCulate:MONitor:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum:RIGHt Notes Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Next Peak Left (Remote Command Only)

  • Page 820: Delta Next Peak Right  (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Peak Search Delta Next Peak Right  (Remote Command Only) Performs a Next Peak with the specified delta marker.  Remote Command :CALCulate[1]|2:DELTamarker[1]|2|...|4:MAXimum:RIGHt Example :CALC:DELT4:MAX:RIGH  Performs a Next Peak Right with Delta Marker 4.  Backwards Compatibility Aliased to :CALCulate:MONitor:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:RIGHt, however if the specified marker is not on or is Notes not a delta marker, the analyzer first turns it on and makes it a delta marker.

  • Page 821: Print

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Print Print "Print" on page 271 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 822: Quick Save

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Quick Save Quick Save The Quick Save front-panel key repeats the most recent save that was performed from the Save menu, with the following exceptions: • Register saves are not remembered as Saves for the purpose of the Quick Save function •...
  • Page 823 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Quick Save If you enter a file name for a given file type, then the prefix becomes the filename you entered instead of the default prefix, followed by an underscore. The last four letters (the suffix) are the 4-digit number. For example, if you save a measurement results file as “fred.csv”, then the next auto file name chosen for a measurement results save will be fred_0000.csv.

  • Page 824: Recall

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall Recall The recall key accesses the menu that allows you to load a measurement state and data from external files or registers. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 State The Recall State menu lets you choose a register or file from which to recall the state.  The content of a state file includes all of the settings and data required to return the analyzer as closely as possible to the Mode it was in, with the exact settings that were in place, when the save occurred.

  • Page 825: More Information

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall matches, a full recall proceeds by aborting the currently running measurement, clearing any pending operations, and then loading the State from the saved state file. You can open state files from any mode, so recalling a State file switches to the mode that was active when the save occurred. After switching to the mode of the saved state file, mode settings and data (if any for the mode) are loaded with values from the saved file.

  • Page 826: From File

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall You want all traces to load exactly Save State On recall, all traces’ mode and data as they were when saved. will be exactly as they were when saved.  Any traces that were updating willhave their data immediately overwritten.

  • Page 827: Edit Register Names

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths; the Enter key to open a directory; and the Backspace key to go back one directory.

  • Page 828: Register 1 Thru Register 16

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall Key Path Recall, State Mode Dependencies N9060A–7FP or N9060B–2FP license required to edit the register names.  When the feature is not licensed, sending the SCPI command generates an error, –221,"Settings conflict;Option not available" Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 Register 1 thru Register 16 Selecting any one of these register keys causes the State of the mode from the specified Register to be...

  • Page 829: Data (Import)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall modified. In addition, you can use the Edit Register Names key under Save, State to enter custom names for each register. Registers are shared by all modes, so recalling from any one of the registers will cause a mode switch to the mode that was active when the save to the Register occurred.

  • Page 830: Amplitude Correction

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall Notes The menu is built from whatever data types are available for the mode. Some keys will be missing completely, so the key locations in the sub-menu will vary. No SCPI command directly controls the Data Type that this key controls. The Data Type is included in the MMEM:LOAD commands.

  • Page 831: Amplitude Correction

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall Couplings When a correction file is loaded from mass storage, it is automatically turned on (Correction ON) and ApplyCorrections is set to On. This allows you to see its effect, thus confirming the load. Readback selected Correction Backwards :MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection ANTenna | CABLe | OTHer | USER, <filename>...

  • Page 832: Default Directory

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall Couplings When a correction file is loaded from mass storage, it is automatically turned on (Correction ON) and ApplyCorrections is set to On. This allows you to see its effect, thus confirming the load. Readback selected Correction Backwards :MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection ANTenna | CABLe | OTHer | USER, <filename>...

  • Page 833: Trace

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range User| Preloaded Readback “User”| “Preloaded” Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Trace This key selects Trace as the data type to be imported.  When pressed a second time, it brings up the Trace Menu, which lets you select the Trace into which the data will be imported.

  • Page 834: Limit Selection

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall myLimitLine2.csv in the current path. The default path is depending on the Limit Default Directory selection. Dependencies Errors are reported if the file is empty or missing, or if the file type does not match, or if there is a mismatch between the file type and the destination data type. ...

  • Page 835: Open

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Recall Preset PRELoaded State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range User| Preloaded Readback “User”| “Preloaded” Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Open… When you press “Open”, the analyzer brings up a Windows dialog and a menu entitled “File Open.” This menu allows you to navigate to the various fields in the Windows dialog without using a keyboard or mouse.

  • Page 836: Restart

    (displayed average count reset to 1) for a trace in Clear Write, but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold. In the X-Series, the Restart hardkey and the INITiate:RESTart command restart not only Trace Average, but MaxHold and MinHold traces as well.
  • Page 837 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Restart Even when set for Single operation, multiple sweeps may be taken when Restart is pressed (for example, when averaging/holding is on). Thus when we say that Restart "restarts a measurement," we may mean: • It restarts the current sweep •...

  • Page 838: Save

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save Save The Save menu lets you choose what you want to save and where you want to save it. Among the types of files you can save are States, Traces, and Screen Images. In addition, an Export (Data) option lets you save a number of data types as CSV files for easy import into Excel and other spreadsheet programs.
  • Page 839 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save update. After saving to a file, the analyzer automatically returns to the previous menu and any Save As dialog goes away. Backwards :MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<filename> Compatibility SCPI For backwards compatibility, the above syntax is supported.  The "1" is simply ignored. The command is sequential.
  • Page 840 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save File/Folder List Enables you to navigate to the center of the dialog that contains the list of files and folders. Once here you can get information about the file and use the tab keys to navigate to the other fields in the dialog, such as Save In.

  • Page 841: Edit Register Names

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save Key Path Save, State Mode Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a State Save Type Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys, to help you remember what you are using that state to save.

  • Page 842: Register 1 Thru Register 16

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save If you try to edit the name of an empty register, the analyzer will first save the state to have a file to put the name in. If you load a named state file into an analyzer with older firmware it will ignore the metadata. The *SAV and *RCL commands will not be affected by the custom register names, nor will the MMEM commands. ...

  • Page 843: Data (Export)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument, not one set for each Mode. When a state is saved, the Mode it was saved from is saved with it; then when it is recalled, the instrument switches to that Mode. After the save completes, the corresponding register menu key annotation is updated with the date and time and the message "Register <register number>...

  • Page 844: Amplitude Correction

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save Amplitude Correction Pressing this key selects Amplitude Corrections as the data type to be exported. Pressing this key again brings up the Select Menu, which allows the user to select which Amplitude Correction to save. Amplitude Corrections are fully discussed in the documentation of the Input/Output key, under the Corrections softkey.
  • Page 845 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save Line Type of field Example Notes may not be omitted. . If exceeds 60 characters,  error –233 Too much data reported Instrument Version, Model # A.02.06,N9020A May be empty but may not be omitted Option List, File Format K03 LFE EXM ,01 May be empty but may not be omitted Version...
  • Page 846 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save two different corrections may be applied. It is expected that in the corrections data itself, there will be TWO corrections values exactly at Max Freq, otherwise Overlap is ignored. The way the overlap is processed is as follows: if at any given time the current analyzer Start Freq is greater than Freq 1 and lower than Freq 2, and the current Stop Freq is greater than Freq 2, extend the first correction point at or above Freq 2 down to Freq 1, rather than using the correction data between Freq1 and Freq2. ...

  • Page 847: Amplitude Correction

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save • Frequency Interpolation:  Logarithmic, Linear Amplitude Correction These keys let you choose which Correction to save. Once selected, the key returns back to the Export Data menu and the selected Correction number is annotated on the key.  The next step in the Save process is to select the Save As key in the Export Data menu.

  • Page 848: Strip Chart Trace File Content

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save Trace EMI:FSCAN A.07.00 N9020A 526 EA3 B25 P26 PFR Preselector Scan Type Smooth Number of scans Y Axis Unit dBuV Ref Level Offset 0 dB Coupling Input Z Correction 50 ohm Data Trace Detector Peak 30000000 –91.67179747 30060002.47...

  • Page 849: Monitor Spectrum Trace File Content

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save Frequency 600000000 Freq Offset Attenuation Y Axis Unit dBuV Ref Level Offset Internal Preamp State Internal Preamp Band Resolution Bandwidth 120000 Dwell Time 0.05 Peak Hold Infinite Peak Hold Time Max Duration Data Trace Detector Peak QuasiPeak EmiAverage...

  • Page 850: Limit

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save Trace EMI:MON A.13.00 N9038A 526 DP2 EMC LSN Preselector Y Axis Unit dBuV Ref Level Offset 0 dB Coupling Input Z Correction 50 ohm DATA Trace Detector Peak 29740009.9 9.302139008 29741009.9 9.609657014 29742009.9 9.945373261 29743009.9 10.28534671 29744009.9 10.59982272...

  • Page 851: Limits File Contents

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save ".csv file format" on page 851 ".lim file format" on page 852 Key Path Save, Data Remote Command :MMEMory:STORe:LIMit LLINE1 | LLINE2 | LLINE3 | LLINE4 | LLINE5 | LLINE6,<filename> Example :MMEM:STOR:LIM LLINE2, "myLimitLine2.csv" saves the 2nd Limit Line to the file myLimitLine2.csv in the current path. ...

  • Page 852: Lim File Format

    The data region begins with the keyword DATA: .lim file format This is a legacy format which allows files saved from older analyzers to be loaded into the X-Series.  Design of files in this format is not recommended. Save As . . .

  • Page 853: Screen Image

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save My Documents\<mode name>\data\limits For all of the Measurement Results Data Files: My Documents\<mode name>\data\<measurement name>\results For all of the Capture Buffer Data Files: My Documents\<mode name>\data\captureBuffer Key Path Save, Data Mode Notes The key location is mode-dependent and will vary. Brings up the Save As dialog for saving a <mode specific>...

  • Page 854: Themes

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save When you continue on into the Save As menu and complete the Screen Image save, the image depicted in the thumbnail is the one that gets saved, showing the menus that were on the screen before going into the Save menus.

  • Page 855: D Color

    This is much like the "Flat Color" theme available in X-Series. Also, if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black & white screen image, that would be much like "Flat Monochrome".   In other words, each of the X-Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA/PSA. But they are not identical.

  • Page 856: Flat Monochrome

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save Example MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM FCOL Readback Flat Color Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Flat Monochrome Selects a format that is like Flat Color. But only black is used (no colors, not even gray), and no fill. Key Path Save, Screen Image, Themes Example...

  • Page 857: Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save indicates the total amount of storage available, also in bytes. The <file_entry> is a string. Each <file_ entry>  indicates the name, type, and size of one file in the directory list: <file_name>,<file_type>,<file_size> As the windows file system has an extension that indicates file type, <file_type> is always empty. <file_size>...

  • Page 858: Mass Storage Delete   (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save Key path SCPI Only Remote Command :MMEMory:COPY:DEVice <source_string>,<dest_string> Notes The strings must be a valid logical path or a valid device keyword. If the dest_string is a device keyword, the data is copied from the source file to the device. If the source_string is a device keyword, the data is copied to the source file from the device. ...

  • Page 859: Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Save This command will generate an “access denied” error if the new directory would be in a restricted folder (e.g., C:\Windows) and the current user does not have Power User or Administrator privileges. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only) Key path...

  • Page 860: Single (Single Measurement/Sweep)

    (displayed average count reset to 1), but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold.  In the X-Series, the Single hardkey and the INITiate:IMM command initiate a sweep/ measurement/ average sequence/hold sequence including MaxHold and MinHold.

  • Page 861: Source

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Source Source There is no Source control functionality for this measurement. When this key is pressed, the screen either displays a blank menu, or the previously-selected menu remains unchanged. Key Path Front-panel key EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 862: Span X Scale

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement SPAN X Scale SPAN X Scale Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the span parameters. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Span Sets the span of the Spectrum display. Key Path SPAN X Scale Remote Command [:SENSe]:MONitor:FREQuency:SPAN <frequency>...

  • Page 863: Last Span

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement SPAN X Scale 200 kHz 100 Hz – 1 kHz 100 kHz 100 Hz – 1 kHz 50 kHz 30 Hz – 300 Hz 20 kHz 10 Hz – 100 Hz 10 kHz 10 Hz – 100 Hz 5 kHz 10 Hz –...

  • Page 864: Sweep/Control

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Sweep/Control Sweep/Control Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the sweep/control parameters. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Clear List And Restart This key will perform the following when pressed: 1. Prompt you for confirmation to delete all signals in signal list with the following message:  2.

  • Page 865: System

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement System System "System" on page 272 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 866: Trace/ Detector

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trace/ Detector Trace/ Detector Displays a menu of keys that enable you to control the trace setting for the Spectrum Window. The traces in the Spectrum display contain 2001 points. For more information see: "Trace Annunciator Panel" on page 866 Key Path Front-panel key Remote Command...

  • Page 867: Select Trace

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trace/ Detector If the letter is white it means the trace is being updated (Update = On); if the letter is dimmed , it means the trace is not being updated (Update = Off). A strikethrough (e.g., W) indicates that the trace is blanked (Display = Off).

  • Page 868: Max Hold

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trace/ Detector Averaging is always done on the Voltage scale, meaning that the averaging process works on the voltage of the envelope of the signal.   In the equation for averaging on this scale (below), K is the number of averages accumulated.

  • Page 869: Min Hold

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trace/ Detector Min Hold In Min Hold type the analyzer maintains and displays a min hold trace, which represents the minimum data value on a point-by-point basis of the new trace data and previous trace data. Pressing the Min Hold key for the selected trace, or sending the :TRAC:TYPE MINH command for the specified trace, sets the trace type to Min Hold, causes the trace to be cleared, and causes the Min Hold sequence to be (re)started, even if you are already in Max Hold.

  • Page 870: Trace Update State On/Off

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trace/ Detector Notes The four states of this 1-of-N actually set two variables, Update and Display, to their four possible combinations: • Trace On: Update and Display both On • View: Update Off and Display On •...

  • Page 871: More Information

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trace/ Detector More Information When a trace becomes inactive, the following things happen: • Any update from the SENSe system (detectors) immediately stops (does not wait for end of sweep) • the trace is displayed at half intensity (as long as it stays inactive) Inactive traces display across the entire X Axis of the instrument.

  • Page 872: Copy Trace (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trace/ Detector Copy Trace (Remote Command Only) Remote Command :TRACe:MONitor:COPY TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3, TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 Example TRAC:MON:COPY TRACE1, TRACE3 copies Trace 1 to Trace 3 and puts Trace 3 in Update=Off, Display=On Notes The TRACe:MONitor:COPY command is of the form:...

  • Page 873: Trace Display (Remote Command Only)

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trace/ Detector Remote Command Notes When TRACE1, the latest contents of trace 1 will be returned. When TRACE2, the latest contents of trace 2 will be returned. When TRACE3, the latest contents of trace 3 will be returned. When SINGle, the current power values of all activated meters are returned separated by commas in the order meters number.

  • Page 874: Trigger

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trigger Trigger "Trigger" on page 358 Free Run "Free Run " on page 365 Video "Video (IF Envelope) " on page 366 Trigger Level "Trigger Level " on page 366 Trig Slope "Trig Slope " on page 367 Trig Delay "Trig Delay "...

  • Page 875: Trig Delay

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement Trigger Trig Delay "Trig Delay " on page 374 Zero Span Delay Comp "Zero Span Delay Comp On/Off" on page 374 Auto/Holdoff "Auto/Holdoff " on page 375 Auto Trig "Auto Trig " on page 375 Trig Holdoff "Trig Holdoff "...

  • Page 876: User Preset

    Preset without affecting the trace data, limit lines or correction data. In the X-Series, “state” always includes all of this data; so whenever state is loaded, or User Preset is executed, all of the traces, limit lines and corrections are affected.   Although this differs from previous behavior, it is desirable behavior, and should not cause adverse issues for users.

  • Page 877: User Preset All Modes

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement User Preset Key Path User Preset Remote Command :SYSTem:PRESet:USER Example :SYST:PRES:USER:SAVE:SYST:PRES:USER Notes :SYST:PRES:USER:SAVE is used to save the current state as the user preset state. Clears all pending OPC bits. The Status Byte is set to 0. Pressing the User Preset front-panel key while already in the User Preset menu will cause the User Preset to get executed Couplings...

  • Page 878: Save User Preset

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement User Preset Save User Preset Saves the currently active mode and its State. You can recall this User Preset file by pressing the User Preset menu key or sending the SYST:PRES:USER remote command.  This same state is also saved by the Save State function.

  • Page 879: View/Display

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display View/Display The View/Display key opens the Display and View menus. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Display The Display menu is common to most measurements, and is used for configuring items on the display. Some Display menu settings apply to all the measurements in a mode, and some only to the current measurement. ...

  • Page 880: Meas Bar On/Off

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display Key Path View/Display, Display Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Meas Bar On/Off This function turns the Measurement Bar on and off, including the settings panel. When off, the graticule area expands to fill the area formerly occupied by the Measurement Bar. Key Path View/Display, Display, Annotation Remote Command...

  • Page 881: Screen

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display Screen This controls the display of the annunciation and annotation around the graticule, including any annotation on lines (such as the display line, the threshold line, etc.) and the y-axis annotation. This does NOT include marker annotation (or the N dB result).

  • Page 882: Title

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display Key Path View/Display, Display, Annotation Remote Command :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 :DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe]? Example DISP:ACT OFF Dependencies Grayed out and forced to OFF when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to Off. Preset This should remain Off through a Preset when System DisplaySettings, Annotation is set to Off State Saved Saved in instrument state.

  • Page 883: Clear Title

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display Press Change Title to enter a new title through the alpha editor. Press Enter or Return to complete the entry. Press ESC to cancel the entry and preserve your existing title. The display title will replace the measurement name. It remains for this measurement until you press Change Title again, or you recall a state, or a Preset is performed.

  • Page 884: Graticule

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display Graticule Pressing Graticule turns the display graticule On or Off. It also turns the graticule y-axis annotation on and off. Key Path View/Display, Display Remote Command :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 :DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]? Example DISP:WIND:TRAC:GRAT:GRID OFF Notes The graticule is the set of horizontal and vertical lines that make up the grid/divisions for the x-axis and y-axis.

  • Page 885: Themes

    This is much like the "Flat Color" theme available in X-Series. Also, if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black & white screen image, that would be much like "Flat Monochrome".   In other words, each of the X-Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA/PSA. But they are not identical.

  • Page 886: Backlight

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display Flat Color Selects a format that is best when the screen is to be printed on an ink printer. Key Path Save, Screen Image, Themes Example MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM FCOL Readback Flat Color Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Flat Monochrome Selects a format that is like Flat Color.

  • Page 887: Expand Meters

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display Preset 100 (Set by Restore Misc Defaults) Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Expand Meters Monitor Spectrum displays the Spectrum on the left and the Meters on the right.  When Expand Meters is off, the normal view is presented.  When Expand Meters is on, the meters display is expanded and large characters are used, for easy viewing at a distance.

  • Page 888: Meters Rbw Lines

    10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display Meters RBW Lines When Meters RBW Lines is turned on, two blue vertical lines appear on the display, equal distances from the center of the graticule.  Their spacing matches the current setting for the Meters RBW as shown below. If the Meters RBW is wider than the span of the Monitor Spectrum display, these lines are not shown.
  • Page 889 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display And here are the views with the top window zoomed, with and without expanded meters: EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 890 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 891 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display This window displays the trace and graticule from the Freq Scan display.  Marker is available. The X axis can be Log or Lin depending on the setting in Frequency Scan measurement. EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 892 10  Monitor Spectrum Measurement View/Display EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 893 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer EMI Receiver Mode Reference 11 APD Measurement The Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD) measurement shows power statistical data in graphical format and in a signal list. Measurement Commands for APD CONFigure:APD CONFigure:APD:NDEFault CONFigure? INITiate:APD FETCh:APD[n]? MEASure:APD[n]? READ:APD[n]? Topics in this section are: "Remote Command Results for APD"...
  • Page 894 11  APD Measurement Remote Command Results for APD Command Return Value INITiate:APD CONFigure? name of current measurement: "APD" CONFigure:APD n/a  (selects the APD measurement in Meas Preset state) CONFigure:APD:NDEFault n/a (selects the APD measurement without affecting settings) FETCh:APD[n]? Returns a comma separated list containing detailed information in specified the following format: MEASure:APD[n]?
  • Page 895 11  APD Measurement Measurement Description Traditionally, EMI measurements have been performed by EMI receivers using defined RBW and detector modes like quasi-peak, peak and average. However, the advances in digital technology created a need for a measurement method to protect digital radio communication services. APD was introduced in Amendment 1:2005 to CISPR 16–1–1:2003 as a new weighting method to accurately determine the electromagnetic disturbance emitted by electrical appliances or equipment, which degrade the performance of digital communication system.

  • Page 896: Amptd Y Scale

    11  APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale AMPTD Y Scale Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the amplitude parameters. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Attenuation Enables you to set the value of the Attenuation parameter. This key only affects the Mechanical Attenuator in the EMI Receiver mode and has no Auto setting.

  • Page 897: Autorange

    11  APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Autorange Accesses a menu that enables you to choose whether or not to turn on the Autorange feature. Key Path Amptd Y Scale Readback In square brackets, the state of Autorange then the state of Auto Preamp, separated by commas, as [Rng:On, Pre:Off] Initial S/W Revision A.13.00...

  • Page 898: Proper Preselector Operation

    11  APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale pressed, the analyzer will turn on the selected marker, perform a peak search, and then perform centering on the marker’s center frequency. If the selected marker is already on and between the start and stop frequencies of the analyzer, the analyzer performs the preselector calibration on that marker’s frequency.

  • Page 899: Preselector Adjust

    Preset or power cycle. –500 MHz 500 MHz Default Unit Backwards [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MMW:PADJust PSA had multiple preselectors, but the X-Series has only one. These commands simply alias to [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 900: Amplitude Unit

    [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector? Notes PSA had multiple preselectors, and you could select which preselector to adjust. Since the X-Series has only one mm/uW preselector, the preselector selection softkey is no longer available. However,  to provide backward compatibility, we accept the legacy remote commands.

  • Page 901: Dbmv

    11  APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale The following SCPI will return a –224, “Illegal parameter value”. UNIT:POW DBUV_MHZ UNIT:POW DBUA_MHZ UNIT:POW DBPW_MHZ UNIT:POW DBPT_MHZ UNIT:POW DBMV_MHZ Backwards :CALCulate[1]|2:UNIT:POWer Compatibility SCPI Backwards Compatibility ESU supports both :CALCulate[1]|2:UNIT:POWer and UNIT[1]|2. SCPI Notes Note that the suffix [1]|2 is irrelevant to the measurement, they are added solely for the compatibility purpose CALC:UNIT:POW DBUV is an alias to UNIT:POW DBUV...

  • Page 902: Dbma

    11  APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale dBmA This sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale to dBmA. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Amplitude Unit Example UNIT:APD:POW DBMA Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON.  Readback dBmA Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 903: Dbµv

    11  APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale dBµV This sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale to dBµV. Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Amplitude Unit Example UNIT:APD:POW DBUV Dependencies Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback dBµV Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 904: Dbµv/M

    11  APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale dBµV/m This sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale to dBµV/m. This is an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the other Antenna Units are grayed out.

  • Page 905: None

    11  APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Amplitude Unit, Antenna Unit Example UNIT:APD:POW DBPT Dependencies Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback dBpT Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 This sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale to dBG. This is an antenna unit, and this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON.
  • Page 906 11  APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale Scope Meas Global Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]? Dependencies Preamp is not available on all hardware platforms. If the preamp is not present or is unlicensed, the key is not shown. The preamp is not available when the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled.

  • Page 907: Low Band

    11  APD Measurement AMPTD Y Scale Key Path AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp Example :POW:GAIN OFF Readback Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Low Band Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band. The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Low Band key label.

  • Page 908: Auto Couple

    11  APD Measurement Auto Couple Auto Couple The Auto Couple feature provides a quick and convenient way to automatically couple multiple instrument settings. This helps ensure accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range. When the Auto Couple feature is activated, either from the front panel or remotely, all parameters of the current measurement that have an Auto/Manual mode are set to Auto mode and all measurement settings dependent on (or coupled to) the Auto/Man parameters are automatically adjusted for optimal performance.
  • Page 909 11  APD Measurement Auto Couple EMI Receiver Mode Reference...
  • Page 910 11  APD Measurement Displays the menu key that enables you to control the resolution BW. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 Res BW Activates the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) action function, which allows you to manually set the RBW. Key Path Remote Command [:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <freq>...
  • Page 911 11  APD Measurement < 1 kHz 10 Hz 1 kHz to < 10 kHz 100 Hz 10 kHz to < 150 kHz 1 kHz 150 kHz to <30 MHz 10 kHz 30 MHz  to <1 GHz 100 kHz ≥1 GHz 1 MHz Preset 120 kHz...

  • Page 912: Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)

    (displayed average count reset to 1), but does not restart Max Hold and Min Hold. The X-Series has Single and Cont keys in place of the SweepSingleCont key.  In the X-Series, if in single measurement, the Cont key (and INIT:CONT ON ) switches to continuous measurement, but never restarts a measurement and never resets a sweep.
  • Page 913 11  APD Measurement Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep) the INIT:CONT 0 command will place the analyzer in Single Sweep but will have no effect on the current sequence until k = N, at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state.

  • Page 914: File

    11  APD Measurement File File "File" on page 266 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 915: Freq Channel

    11  APD Measurement FREQ Channel FREQ Channel Displays the menu keys that enable you to control the frequency parameters. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Frequency Sets the frequency of Meters in the Frequency Scan measurement. For the Strip Chart measurement, this key will set the frequency for both meters and strip chart.

  • Page 916: Freq À Signal (Replace)

    11  APD Measurement FREQ Channel Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq> [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO? Example FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON FREQ:CENT:STEP 500 MHz FREQ:CENT UP increases the current center frequency value by 500 MHz FREQ:CENT:STEP? FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO? Notes Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 508, 513, 526) Preset Auto State Saved...
  • Page 917 11  APD Measurement FREQ Channel Key Path FREQ Channel Remote Command :CALCulate:APD:SLISt:APPend Example CALC:APD:SLIS:APP Notes If there is no free space in the signal list, you will be prompted by a message that asks whether to continue or not: WARNING! There is not enough free space in Signal List. Would you like to clear the Signal list before adding signals? ...

  • Page 918: Input/Output

    11  APD Measurement Input/Output Input/Output "Input/Output" on page 150 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 919: Marker

    11  APD Measurement Marker Marker This displays a menu that enables you to set the marker control mode to Normal, Delta or Off. If the selected marker is Off, pressing Marker sets it to Normal and places it at probability of 10–1 (Or at a point after the probability of 10–1 if the latter point does not exits) on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules.

  • Page 920: Select Marker

    11  APD Measurement Marker marker is Off the response is not a number. Preset After a preset, all Markers are turned OFF, so Marker X Axis Value query will return a not a number (NAN). State Saved 25 dBuV 124.99 dBuV Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Remote Command...

  • Page 921: Delta

    11  APD Measurement Marker Delta Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Delta and turns on the active function for setting its delta value. If the selected marker is off, the marker is placed at the beginning of the trace. In Delta mode, the marker result shows the relative result between the selected (Delta) marker and its reference marker.

  • Page 922: Marker Trace

    11  APD Measurement Marker Key Path Marker, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:REFerence <integer> :CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:REFerence? Example CALC:APD:MARK1:REF 3 CALC:APD:MARK2:REF? Notes A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is grayed out, and if sent from SCPI generates error –221: “Settings conflict; marker cannot be relative to itself.” When queried a single value will be returned (the specified marker numbers relative marker).

  • Page 923: All Markers Off

    11  APD Measurement Marker Preset Off, presets on Mode Preset and All Markers Off State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 All Markers Off This turns off all the markers. Key Path Marker Remote Command :CALCulate:APD:MARKer:AOFF Example CALC:APD:MARK:AOFF Initial S/W Revision A.13.00...

  • Page 924: Normal Marker Y Axis Value

    11  APD Measurement Marker Example CALC:MARK3:X 30  Turn on maker 3 in Normal mode, by default will set the marker amplitude to 30 dBuV.   CALC:MARK3:X?  Turn on maker 3 in Normal mode and query the X axis value.  Notes This SCPI is alias to :CALC:APD:MARK[1]|2|3|4:MODE POS; :CALC:APD:MARK[1]|2|3|4:X? Preset 25 dBuV Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 925: Delta Marker Y Axis Value

    11  APD Measurement Marker Delta Marker Y Axis Value Enables you to set the selected marker to Delta mode, and gets the marker Y Axis Values. The output is always a relative value referred to the reference marker. Remote Command :CALCulate[1]|2:DELTamarker[1]|2|...|4:Y? Example CALC:DELT3:Y? ...

  • Page 926: Marker

    11  APD Measurement Marker -> Marker -> Displays the menu keys that enable you to append new elements into the existing signal list. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Marker à List Appends the frequency, Disturbance level (E meas), Probability of Time (ρ meas) where the selected marker stays in the signal list.

  • Page 927: Markerfunction

    11  APD Measurement MarkerFunction MarkerFunction There is no Marker Function supported in APD measurement. The front-panel key will display a blank menu when pressed. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front-panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 928: Meas

    11  APD Measurement Meas Meas The information in this section is common to all measurements. For key and remote command information for a specific measurement, refer to the section that describes the measurement of interest. Measurements available under the Meas key are specific to the current Mode. When viewing Help for measurements, note the following: Operation for some keys differs between measurements.

  • Page 929: Measurement Group Of Commands

    11  APD Measurement Meas Measurement Group of Commands Measure Commands: :MEASure:<measurement>[n]? This is a fast single-command way to make a measurement using the factory default instrument settings. These are the settings and units that conform to the Mode Setup settings (e.g. radio standard) that you have currently selected. •...
  • Page 930 11  APD Measurement Meas the factory default instrument settings. It does not initiate the taking of measurement data unless INIT:CONTinuous is ON. If you change any measurement settings after using the CONFigure command, the READ command can be used to initiate a measurement without changing the settings back to their defaults.

  • Page 931: Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only)

    11  APD Measurement Meas measurement and you send READ:ACP? it will initiate a new measurement using the same instrument settings. • Initiates the measurement and puts valid data into the output buffer. If a measurement other than the current one is specified, the instrument will switch to that measurement before it initiates the measurement and returns results.

  • Page 932: Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)

    11  APD Measurement Meas Remote Command :CALCulate:DATA[n]? Notes The return trace depends on the measurement. In CALCulate:<meas>:DATA[n], n is any valid subopcode for the current measurement. It returns the same data as the FETCh:<measurement>? query where <measurement> is the current measurement.
  • Page 933 11  APD Measurement Meas • CFIT or curve fit - applies curve fitting routines to the data. <soffset> and <length> are required to define the data that you want. <roffset> is an optional parameter for the desired order of the curve equation. The query will return the following values: the x-offset (in seconds) and the curve coefficients ((order + 1) values).
  • Page 934 11  APD Measurement Meas • RMS - returns a single value that is the average power on a root-mean-squared voltage scale (arithmetic rms) of the data point values for the specified region(s) of trace data. See the following equation. For I/Q trace data, the rms of the magnitudes of the I/Q pairs is returned. See the following equation. This function is very useful for I/Q trace data.
  • Page 935 11  APD Measurement Meas where Xi is a data point value, X is the arithmetic mean of the data point values for the specified region (s), and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s). where |Xi| is the magnitude of an I/Q pair, X is the mean of the magnitudes for the specified region(s), and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s).
  • Page 936 11  APD Measurement Meas Sample Trace Data - Not Constant Envelope (See below for explanation of variables.) <soffset> - start offset is an optional real number. (It is in seconds for time-domain traces, and is a dimensionless index 0 to Npoints – 1, for frequency-domain traces). It specifies the amount of data at the beginning of the trace that will be ignored before the decimation process starts.

  • Page 937: Calculate Peaks Of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)

    11  APD Measurement Meas Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only) Returns a list of all the peaks for the currently selected measurement and sub-opcode [n]. The peaks must meet the requirements of the peak threshold and excursion values. n = any valid sub-opcode for the current measurement.

  • Page 938: Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)

    11  APD Measurement Meas excursion value stored under the Peak Criteria menu. Values must be provided for threshold and excursion. The sorting and display line parameters are optional (defaults are AMPLitude and ALL). Note that there is always a Y-axis value for the display line, regardless of whether the display line state is on or off.

  • Page 939: Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)

    11  APD Measurement Meas The specs for each output type follow: ASCii - Amplitude values are in ASCII, in the current Y Axis Unit, one ASCII character per digit, values separated by commas, each value in the form: SX.YYYYYEsZZ Where: S = sign (+ or -) X = one digit to left of decimal point Y = 5 digits to right of decimal point...

  • Page 940: Meas Setup

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Meas Setup Displays a menu of keys that enable you to set up the measurement. Key Path Front-panel key Notes Front panel only. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Select Signal Specifies the selected signal. The term “Selected signal” is used throughout this document to specify which signal will be affected by the functions.

  • Page 941: Measure

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Measure Specifies the signal coverage for the automated APD measurement. Key Path Meas Setup Remote Command [:SENSe]:APD:MEAS ALL|MARKed [:SENSe]:APD:MEAS? Example APD:MEAS ALL APD:MEAS? Notes ALL = All Signals MARKed = Marked Signals Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state.

  • Page 942: Limit On/Off

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Limit On/Off Selects whether the limit is displayed. If Test Limits is on, this also determines whether the test trace (see "Test Trace" on page 943) will be tested against the limit. If Limit On/Off is On and the current frequency is within the defined limit frequency, the following occurs: •...

  • Page 943: Test Trace

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Preset Limit 1 State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Test Trace Selects the trace that you want the limit to test.  Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Properties Remote Command :CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:TRACe MEAS|MEAS2 :CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:TRACe? Example CALC:APD:LLIN:TRAC MEAS ...

  • Page 944: Comment

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Comment Sets an ASCII comment field, which will be stored in an exported file. The comment can be displayed in the active function area by selecting it as the active function, if desired to be in a screen capture. The Limits .csv file supports this field.

  • Page 945: Apd Method

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Disturbance Level (E limit)/ Probability of Time (ρ limit) Enables you to edit the disturbance level or probability of the current row. Depending on the APD Method, this key can be a Disturbance Level or Probability of Time. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Edit Notes...
  • Page 946 11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, APD Method Example CALC:APD:LLIN:METH DLEV State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Probability of Time (Constant) Defines the probability where the Disturbance Level limit is applies to. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, APD Method, Disturbance Level Remote Command...
  • Page 947 11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Sets the Probability of Time constant to 10–3. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, APD Method, Disturbance Level, Probability of Time Example CALC:APD:LLIN:METH:DLEV:PROB N3 Readback 10–3 Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Sets the Probability of Time constant to 10–4. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, APD Method, Disturbance Level, Probability of Time Example...

  • Page 948: Insert Point Below

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Readback 10–7 Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Probability of Time Set the Limit APD method to Probability of Time. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, APD Method Example CALC:APD:LLIN:METH PROB State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Disturbance Level (Constant) Defines the disturbance level where the Probability limit is applies to.

  • Page 949: Delete Point

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Delete Point Pressing this key immediately deletes the currently selected point, whether or not that point is being edited, or selected through Navigate.  The point following the currently-selected point (or the point before this point if there is none) will be selected. Key Path Meas Setup, Limits, Edit Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 950: Delete All Limits

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Delete All Limits Deletes all limit lines. Pressing Delete All Limits purges the data from all limit line tables. All limit data will be cleared and returned to factory preset settings. However, since there is only 1 limit line in this measurement, pressing this key has the same result as Delete Limit.

  • Page 951: Frequency Of Disturbance Level Limit (Remote Command Only)

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Frequency of Disturbance Level Limit (Remote Command Only) Defines a list of frequency values for a given disturbance level limit line. Up to 2000 points may be defined for each limit using the following parameters. Remote Command :CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:DLEVel:CONTrol[:DATA] <x>, <x>, …...

  • Page 952: Disturbance Level- E Limit (Remote Command Only, Scpi Standard Compatibility)

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Disturbance Level- E limit (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard compatibility) Defines a list of disturbance values for a given limit line. Up to 200 points may be defined for each limit. The limit defined in this SCPI is enabled when APD method is set to Disturbance Level (CALCulate:APD:LLINe [1]:METHod DLEVel).

  • Page 953: Analog Demod Tune & Listen

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup An empty array returns the system error “list is empty” to a data query, 0 to a POINts query. Remote Command :CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:PROBability[:DATA] <double> | <double> | … :CALCulate:APD:LLINe[1]:PROBability[:DATA]? Example :CALC:APD:LLIN:PROB:DATA 0.1,0.01 describes the probability values of limit line Preset Limit line data is cleared by Restore Mode Defaults.

  • Page 954: De-Emphasis (Fm Demod Only)

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Pressing this key, when it is not selected, selects and activates the FM demodulation function. Pressing it a second time branches to the FM Demod menu where FM demodulation settings can be adjusted. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen Example APD:DEM FM ...
  • Page 955 11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen, FM, De-emphasis Example APD:DEM:FM:DEEM US25 25 ∝s Readback Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 50 µs Sets the De-emphasis time constant to 50 µs. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen, FM, De-emphasis Example APD:DEM:FM:DEEM US50 50 ∝s...

  • Page 956: Meas Preset

    11  APD Measurement Meas Setup Pressing this key, turns the demodulation function off. Key Path Meas Setup, Analog Demod Tune&Listen Example :APD:DEM OFF  Turns off demodulation function. State Saved Saved in instrument state. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Meas Preset Returns the measurement local variables in the current measurement to their preset values. Key Path Meas Setup Remote Command...

  • Page 957: Mode

    11  APD Measurement Mode Mode "Mode" on page 222 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 958: Mode Preset

    In the X-Series, the legacy “Factory Preset” has been replaced with Mode Preset, which only presets Notes the currently active mode, not the entire instrument.  In the X-Series, the way to preset the entire instrument is by using System, Restore System Defaults All, which behaves essentially the same way as restore System Defaults does on ESA and PSA.

  • Page 959: How-To Preset

    11  APD Measurement Mode Preset User Preset. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 How-To Preset The table below shows all possible presets, their corresponding SCPI commands and front-panel access (key paths). Instrument settings depend on the current measurement context. Some settings are local to the current measurement, some are global (common) across all the measurements in the current mode, and some are global to all the available modes.
  • Page 960 11  APD Measurement Mode Preset Power On Mode Preset :SYSTem:PON:TYPE MODE System Menu Power On User Preset :SYSTem:PON:TYPE USER System Menu Power On Last State :SYSTem:PON:TYPE LAST System Menu EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 961: Mode Setup

    11  APD Measurement Mode Setup Mode Setup "Mode Setup" on page 246 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 962: Peak Search

    11  APD Measurement Peak Search Peak Search Pressing Peak Search will place the selected marker at the peak amplitude value that is on screen. Key Path Front-panel key Remote Command :CALCulate:APD:MARKer[1]|2|...|12:MAXimum Example CALC:APD:MARK2:MAX  Performs a peak search using marker 2. CALC:APD:MARK2:Y? ...

  • Page 963: Print

    11  APD Measurement Print Print "Print" on page 271 EMI Receiver Mode Reference...

  • Page 964: Quick Save

    11  APD Measurement Quick Save Quick Save The Quick Save front-panel key repeats the most recent save that was performed from the Save menu, with the following exceptions: • Register saves are not remembered as Saves for the purpose of the Quick Save function •...
  • Page 965 11  APD Measurement Quick Save If you enter a file name for a given file type, then the prefix becomes the filename you entered instead of the default prefix, followed by an underscore. The last four letters (the suffix) are the 4-digit number. For example, if you save a measurement results file as “fred.csv”, then the next auto file name chosen for a measurement results save will be fred_0000.csv.

  • Page 966: Recall

    11  APD Measurement Recall Recall The recall key accesses the menu that allows you to load a measurement state and data from external files or registers. Key Path Front-panel key Initial S/W Revision A.07.00 State The Recall State menu lets you choose a register or file from which to recall the state.  The content of a state file includes all of the settings and data required to return the analyzer as closely as possible to the Mode it was in, with the exact settings that were in place, when the save occurred.

  • Page 967: More Information

    11  APD Measurement Recall matches, a full recall proceeds by aborting the currently running measurement, clearing any pending operations, and then loading the State from the saved state file. You can open state files from any mode, so recalling a State file switches to the mode that was active when the save occurred. After switching to the mode of the saved state file, mode settings and data (if any for the mode) are loaded with values from the saved file.

  • Page 968: From File

    11  APD Measurement Recall You want all traces to load exactly Save State On recall, all traces’ mode and data as they were when saved. will be exactly as they were when saved.  Any traces that were updating willhave their data immediately overwritten.

  • Page 969: Edit Register Names

    11  APD Measurement Recall Look In The Look In field shows the path from which the file will be recalled and allows you to change the path using the up and down arrow keys to navigate to other paths; the Enter key to open a directory; and the Backspace key to go back one directory.

  • Page 970: Register 1 Thru Register 16

    11  APD Measurement Recall Key Path Recall, State Mode Dependencies N9060A–7FP or N9060B–2FP license required to edit the register names.  When the feature is not licensed, sending the SCPI command generates an error, –221,"Settings conflict;Option not available" Initial S/W Revision A.11.00 Register 1 thru Register 16 Selecting any one of these register keys causes the State of the mode from the specified Register to be...

  • Page 971: Data (Import)

    11  APD Measurement Recall modified. In addition, you can use the Edit Register Names key under Save, State to enter custom names for each register. Registers are shared by all modes, so recalling from any one of the registers will cause a mode switch to the mode that was active when the save to the Register occurred.

  • Page 972: Amplitude Correction

    11  APD Measurement Recall Notes The menu is built from whatever data types are available for the mode. Some keys will be missing completely, so the key locations in the sub-menu will vary. No SCPI command directly controls the Data Type that this key controls. The Data Type is included in the MMEM:LOAD commands.

  • Page 973: Default Directory

    11  APD Measurement Recall Couplings When a correction file is loaded from mass storage, it is automatically turned on (Correction ON) and ApplyCorrections is set to On. This allows you to see its effect, thus confirming the load. Readback selected Correction Backwards :MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection ANTenna | CABLe | OTHer | USER, <filename>...

  • Page 974: Limit

    11  APD Measurement Recall sweep points currently set for the measurement.  If this happens, an error message is generated.  Errors are reported if the file is empty or missing, or if the file type does not match, or if there is a mismatch between the file type and the destination data type. ...

  • Page 975: Signal List

    11  APD Measurement Recall Remote Command :MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit:DDIRectory USER|PRELoaded Example :MMEM:LOAD:LIM:DDIR USER Select user :MMEM:LOAD:LIM:DDIR? Notes USER = User PRELoaded = Preloaded Preset PRELoaded State Saved Saved in instrument state. Range User| Preloaded Readback “User”| “Preloaded” Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 Signal List This key selects Signal List as the data type to be imported.

  • Page 976: State

    11  APD Measurement Recall State Most of the functions under this key work the same way in many measurements, so they are documented in the Utility Functions section. For details about this key, see "State" on page 1081. Data (Import) Most of the functions under this key work the same way in many measurements, so they are documented in the Utility Functions section.

  • Page 977: Limit

    11  APD Measurement Recall Example :MMEM:LOAD:TRAC DATA TRACE2, "myTrace2.csv" imports the 2nd trace from the file myTrace2.csv in the current path. The default path is My Documents\EMI\data\xxx\traces where xxx is the measurement name. Dependencies A trace cannot be recalled from a trace file that was exported with ALL traces selected. A trace cannot be imported if the number of trace points in the file do not match the number of sweep points currently set for the measurement. ...

  • Page 978: Open

    11  APD Measurement Recall saved the limit line data to. Otherwise, the default recall directory is My Documents\EMC Limits and Ampcor\Limits, which contains a set of preloaded limit files. Key Path Recall, Export Data, Limit Remote Command :MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit:DDIRectory USER|PRELoaded Example :MMEM:LOAD:LIM:DDIR USER Select user :MMEM:LOAD:LIM:DDIR? Notes...

  • Page 979: Restart

    (displayed average count reset to 1) for a trace in Clear Write, but did not restart Max Hold and Min Hold. In the X-Series, the Restart hardkey and the INITiate:RESTart command restart not only Trace Average, but MaxHold and MinHold traces as well.
  • Page 980 11  APD Measurement Restart Even when set for Single operation, multiple sweeps may be taken when Restart is pressed (for example, when averaging/holding is on). Thus when we say that Restart "restarts a measurement," we may mean: • It restarts the current sweep •...

  • Page 981: Save

    11  APD Measurement Save Save The Save menu lets you choose what you want to save and where you want to save it. Among the types of files you can save are States, Traces, and Screen Images. In addition, an Export (Data) option lets you save a number of data types as CSV files for easy import into Excel and other spreadsheet programs.
  • Page 982 11  APD Measurement Save update. After saving to a file, the analyzer automatically returns to the previous menu and any Save As dialog goes away. Backwards :MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<filename> Compatibility SCPI For backwards compatibility, the above syntax is supported.  The "1" is simply ignored. The command is sequential.
  • Page 983 11  APD Measurement Save File/Folder List Enables you to navigate to the center of the dialog that contains the list of files and folders. Once here you can get information about the file and use the tab keys to navigate to the other fields in the dialog, such as Save In.

  • Page 984: Edit Register Names

    11  APD Measurement Save Key Path Save, State Mode Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a State Save Type Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys, to help you remember what you are using that state to save.

  • Page 985: Register 1 Thru Register 16

    11  APD Measurement Save If you try to edit the name of an empty register, the analyzer will first save the state to have a file to put the name in. If you load a named state file into an analyzer with older firmware it will ignore the metadata. The *SAV and *RCL commands will not be affected by the custom register names, nor will the MMEM commands. ...

  • Page 986: Data (Export)

    11  APD Measurement Save There is one set of 128 state registers in the instrument, not one set for each Mode. When a state is saved, the Mode it was saved from is saved with it; then when it is recalled, the instrument switches to that Mode. After the save completes, the corresponding register menu key annotation is updated with the date and time and the message "Register <register number>...

  • Page 987: Amplitude Correction

    11  APD Measurement Save Amplitude Correction Pressing this key selects Amplitude Corrections as the data type to be exported. Pressing this key again brings up the Select Menu, which allows the user to select which Amplitude Correction to save. Amplitude Corrections are fully discussed in the documentation of the Input/Output key, under the Corrections softkey.
  • Page 988 11  APD Measurement Save Line Type of field Example Notes may not be omitted. . If exceeds 60 characters,  error –233 Too much data reported Instrument Version, Model # A.02.06,N9020A May be empty but may not be omitted Option List, File Format K03 LFE EXM ,01 May be empty but may not be omitted Version...
  • Page 989 11  APD Measurement Save two different corrections may be applied. It is expected that in the corrections data itself, there will be TWO corrections values exactly at Max Freq, otherwise Overlap is ignored. The way the overlap is processed is as follows: if at any given time the current analyzer Start Freq is greater than Freq 1 and lower than Freq 2, and the current Stop Freq is greater than Freq 2, extend the first correction point at or above Freq 2 down to Freq 1, rather than using the correction data between Freq1 and Freq2. ...

  • Page 990: Trace

    11  APD Measurement Save • Frequency Interpolation:  Logarithmic, Linear Trace Pressing this key selects Traces as the data type to be exported. Pressing this key when it is already selected brings up the Trace Menu, which allows you to select which Trace to save. Key Path Save, Data Remote Command...

  • Page 991: Limit

    11  APD Measurement Save 19.46919986 0.638484031 19.56330081 0.632386608 19.65740176 0.626085183 19.75150272 0.619035746 19.84560367 0.612008976 19.93969699 0.604778203 20.03379794 0.598635447 20.1278989 0.592334021 20.22199985 0.585579255 20.3161008 0.578461817 Limit Pressing this key selects Limit Lines as the data type to be exported. Pressing the key a second time brings up the Limit Menu that allows you to select which Limit Line to save.

  • Page 992: Signal List

    11  APD Measurement Save "" "" *,Zorro None,* Frequency Unit, MHz Amplitude Unit, dBuV APD Method, DistLevel Prblty, 0.1 DATA 400, 47.0000000033602 600, 47.0000000033602 (b)Probability Limit "" "" *,Zorro None,* Frequency Unit, MHz Amplitude Unit, dBuV APD Method, Probability Dist Level, 26.0000000033602 DATA 400, 0.1 600, 0.1...

  • Page 993: Apd Signal List File Content

    11  APD Measurement Save Using the C: drive is strongly discouraged, since it runs the risk of being overwritten during an instrument software upgrade. Both single and double quotes are supported for any filename parameter over SCPI. Initial S/W Revision A.13.00 APD Signal List File Content The following file example shows the Signal List file content in comma separated values.

  • Page 994: Screen Image

    11  APD Measurement Save Key Path Save, Data Mode Notes The key location is mode-dependent and will vary. Brings up the Save As dialog for saving a <mode specific> Save Type. The save is performed immediately and does not wait until the measurement is complete. Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Screen Image...

  • Page 995: Themes

    This is much like the "Flat Color" theme available in X-Series. Also, if you selected Reverse Bitmap AND a black & white screen image, that would be much like "Flat Monochrome".   In other words, each of the X-Series themes has a similar screen image type in ESA/PSA. But they are not identical.

  • Page 996: D Monochrome

    11  APD Measurement Save Readback 3D Color Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 3D Monochrome Selects a format that is like 3D color but shades of gray are used instead of colors. Key Path Save, Screen Image, Themes Example MMEM:STOR:SCR:THEM TDM Readback 3D Mono Initial S/W Revision...

  • Page 997: Mass Storage Catalog  (Remote Command Only)

    11  APD Measurement Save where <mode name> is the parameter used to select the mode with the INST:SEL command (for example, SA for the Spectrum Analyzer). Key Path Save, Screen Image Notes Brings up Save As dialog for saving a Screen Image Save Type Initial S/W Revision Prior to A.02.00 Mass Storage Catalog ...

  • Page 998: Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only)

    11  APD Measurement Save Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only) Key path SCPI Only Remote Command :MMEMory:COPY <string>,<string>[,<string>,<string>] Notes The string must be a valid logical path. Copies an existing file to a new file or an existing directory to a new directory. Two forms of parameters are allowed.

  • Page 999: Mass Storage Make Directory  (Remote Command Only)

    11  APD Measurement Save Key path SCPI Only Remote Command :MMEMory:DATA <file_name>, <data> :MMEMory:DATA? <file_name> Notes The string must be a valid logical path. The command form is MMEMory:DATA <file_name>,<data>. It loads <data> into the file <file_ name>. <data> is in 488.2 block format. <file_name> is string data. The query form is MMEMory:DATA? <file_name>...

  • Page 1000: Mass Storage Remove Directory (Remote Command Only)

    11  APD Measurement Save Mass Storage Remove Directory (Remote Command Only) Key path SCPI Only Remote Command :MMEMory:RDIRectory <directory_name> Notes The string must be a valid logical path. Removes a directory. The <directory_name> parameter specifies the directory name to be removed. All files and directories under the specified directory shall also be removed.

This manual is also suitable for:

Pxa n9030aMxa n9020aExa n9010aCxa n9000aEmi n9038a

Table of Contents